ADAM 8000 - Fairchild Engineering Ltd

ADAM 8000 - Fairchild Engineering Ltd
ADAM 8000
Distributed Control I/O System
User's Manual
About this manual
This manual describes all ADAM-8000 components that are available from
Advantech with the exception of the CPUs. In addition to the product
summary it contains detailed descriptions of the different modules. You are
provided with information on the connection and the utilization of the
different ADAM-8000 components. Every chapter is concluded with the
technical data of the respective module.
A separate set of manuals is available for the CPUs.
Overview
Chapter 1: Introduction
This introduction presents the Advantech ADAM-8000 as a centralized as
well as decentralized automation system.
The chapter also contains general information about the ADAM-8000, i.e.
dimensions, installation and operating conditions.
Chapter 2: Profibus-DP
This chapter contains a description of Profibus applications for the ADAM8000. The text describes the configuration of the Advantech Profibus
master and slave modules as well as a number of different communication
examples.
Chapter 3: CAN-Bus CANopen
This chapter deals with the Advantech CANopen slave and related CANbus applications. The structure of the program and the configuration of
CAN slaves is explained by means of examples.
Chapter 4: DeviceNet
This chapter contains a description of the Advantech DeviceNet coupler. A
description of the module is followed by an example of the configuration of
the DeviceNet coupler and the configuration of the ADAM-8000 modules in
the DeviceNet manager of Allen - Bradley. The chapter is concluded with an
overview of diagnostic messages and Profibus interfacing options.
Chapter 5: Counter modules
This chapter deals with Advantech counter modules. The chapter also
contains information on the SSI-module as well as the construction,
configuration and the different counter modes along with the respective
interfaces.
Chapter 6: Power supply
This chapter deals with external power supplies for the ADAM-8000. Here
you can find a comprehensive set of safety related hints and information as
well as details on the construction, the installation and commissioning of
the module.
Chapter 7-8: Digital input/output modules
These chapters describe the digital peripheral modules that are available
from Advantech. It provides all the information that is required for applications using these modules. Chapter 11 contains information on the input
modules, chapter 12 contains information on the output modules and
chapter 13 provides details on input/output modules.
Chapter 9-11: Analog input/output modules
These chapters contain a description of the analog peripheral modules. The
chapter also provides all the information that is required for applications
using each module. Chapter 14 describes the input modules, chapter 15 the
output modules and chapter 16 the analog input/ouutput modules that are
available from Advantech.
Chapter 12: System expansion modules
This chapter deals with the system expansion modules that are available for
ADAM-8000. These include amongst others the bus expansion modules
IM26x that provide for the expansion of a single bus row to cater for several
rows and terminal modules required for the expansion of the available
number of connections.
Chapter 13: Installation and installation-guidelines
This chapter provides all the information required for the installation and
the hook-up of a controller using the components of the ADAM-8000.
The information contained in this manual is supplied without warranties.
The information is subject to change without notice.
Disclaimer of liability
The contents of this manual were verified with respect to the hard- and
software.
However, we assume no responsibility for any discrepancies or errors. The
information in this manual is verified on a regular basis and any required
corrections will be included in subsequent editions.
Suggestions for improvement are always welcome.
Trademarks
STEP®
5 is a registered trademark of Siemens AG.
STEP®
7 is a registered trademark of Siemens AG.
Any other trademarks referred to in the text are the trademarks of the
respective owner and we acknowledge their registration.
Table of Contents
Chapter 1
Introduction ................................................................ 1-1
Overview ........................................................................................................ 1-3
Components ................................................................................................. 1-4
General description ADAM-8000 .................................................................. 1-5
ISO/OSI reference model .............................................................................. 1-6
Communication layers employed by automation systems ......................... 1-8
Chapter 2
Profibus-DP ................................................................. 2-1
Overview ........................................................................................................ 2-2
System overview ........................................................................................... 2-3
Principles ...................................................................................................... 2-5
Communications .......................................................................................... 2-6
Data transfer operation ................................................................................. 2-7
Addressing .................................................................................................. 2-10
Construction of the IM 208 - DP master with RS485 ................................. 2-11
Operating modes ........................................................................................ 2-13
Configuration of IM 208 - DP master with RS485 ...................................... 2-14
Transferring a project ................................................................................. 2-16
Construction of the IM 208 - DP master with a FO link .............................. 2-20
Configuration of IM 208 - DP-Master with FO-link ...................................... 2-23
Construction IM 253 - DP-Slave .................................................................. 2-26
Configuration IM 253 - DP-Slave ................................................................ 2-30
Diagnostic functions of the Profibus-DP slaves ........................................ 2-31
Installation guidelines ................................................................................ 2-38
Commissioning .......................................................................................... 2-49
Using the diagnostic LED’s ........................................................................ 2-51
Example - ADAM-8000 with Profibus under WinNCS ................................ 2-52
Technical data ............................................................................................. 2-55
Chapter 3
CAN-Bus CANopen ..................................................... 3-1
Overview ........................................................................................................ 3-2
System overview ........................................................................................... 3-3
Principles ...................................................................................................... 3-4
Baudrate and module-ID settings .............................................................. 3-10
Message structure ...................................................................................... 3-11
The structure of the process image ........................................................... 3-25
Configuration of the CAN bus coupler ........................................................ 3-26
Module identifiers ....................................................................................... 3-36
Technical data ............................................................................................. 3-37
Chapter 4
DeviceNet .................................................................... 4-1
System overview ........................................................................................... 4-3
Principles ...................................................................................................... 4-4
Advantech DeviceNet-coupler ....................................................................... 4-7
Configuration by means of the DeviceNet manager .................................. 4-10
Specifying Baudrate and Node-Address .................................................... 4-11
Test in conjunction with the DeviceNet ....................................................... 4-12
Module configuration in the DeviceNet-manager ....................................... 4-13
I/O-addressing of the DeviceNet-scanner .................................................. 4-19
Diagnostics ................................................................................................. 4-20
Profibus interface ........................................................................................ 4-24
Chapter 5
Count module ............................................................. 5-1
System overview ........................................................................................... 5-2
Counter module FM 250 ............................................................................... 5-3
Summary of counter modes and interfacing ................................................ 5-6
Counter modes ............................................................................................. 5-8
Chapter 6
Power supplies ........................................................... 6-1
Safety precautions ........................................................................................ 6-3
System overview ........................................................................................... 6-4
Power supply PS 207/2, 2A .......................................................................... 6-5
Installation ..................................................................................................... 6-7
Wiring ............................................................................................................ 6-8
Technical data ............................................................................................... 6-9
Chapter 7
Digital input modules ................................................. 7-1
Overview ........................................................................................................ 7-2
System overview ........................................................................................... 7-3
DI 8xDC24V ................................................................................................... 7-4
DI 8xDC24V active low input ......................................................................... 7-6
DI 4xAC/DC 90...230V ................................................................................... 7-8
DI 8xAC/DC 60...230V ................................................................................. 7-10
DI 8xAC/DC 24...48V ................................................................................... 7-12
DI 16xDC24V ............................................................................................... 7-14
DI 16xDC24V active low input ..................................................................... 7-16
DI 32xDC24V ............................................................................................... 7-18
Chapter 8
Digital output modules ............................................... 8-1
System overview ........................................................................................... 8-3
DO 8xDC24V 1A ............................................................................................ 8-5
DO 8xDC24V 2A ............................................................................................ 8-7
DO 16xDC24V 1A .......................................................................................... 8-9
DO 32xDC24V 1A ........................................................................................ 8-11
DO 8xRelais COM ....................................................................................... 8-13
DO 4xRelais ................................................................................................ 8-19
DO 4xRelais bistable .................................................................................. 8-22
Chapter 9
Analog input modules ................................................ 9-1
System overview ........................................................................................... 9-2
General ......................................................................................................... 9-3
AI 4x16Bit, multi-Input ................................................................................... 9-4
AI 4x12Bit, 4 ... 20mA, isolated .................................................................... 9-14
Chapter 10
Analog output modules ........................................... 10-1
System overview ......................................................................................... 10-2
General ....................................................................................................... 10-3
AO 4x12Bit, Multi-Output .............................................................................. 10-4
Chapter 11
Analog input/output module ................................... 11-1
System overview ......................................................................................... 11-3
AI2/AO2 x12Bit, Multi In/Output .................................................................... 11-5
Chapter 12
System expansion modules .................................... 12-1
System overview ......................................................................................... 12-3
Bus expansion IM 260 ................................................................................ 12-4
Terminal module CM 201 ........................................................................... 12-7
Chapter 13
Assembly and installation guidelines ..................... 13-1
Overview ...................................................................................................... 13-2
Wiring .......................................................................................................... 13-8
Installation dimensions ............................................................................ 13-10
Installation guidelines .............................................................................. 13-11
User considerations
User considerations
Objective and contents
This manual describes the modules that are suitable for use in the ADAM8000. It contains a description of the construction, project implementation
and the technical data.
Target audience
The manual is targeted at users who have a background in automation
technology.
Structure of the manual
At present the manual consists of 18 chapters. Every chapter provides a
self-contained description of a specific topic.
Guide to the document
The following guides are available in the manual:
• An overall table of contents at the beginning of the manual
• An overview of the topics for every chapter
• An index at the end of the manual.
Availability
The manual is available in:
• printed form, on paper
• in electronic form as PDF-file (Adobe Acrobat Reader)
Icons Headings
Important passages in the text are highlighted by following icons and
headings:
Danger!
Immediate or likely danger.
Personal injury is possible.
User considerations
1
User considerations
Attention!
Damages to property is likely if these warnings are not heeded.
Note!
Supplementary information and useful tips
2
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
User considerations
Safety information
Applications conforming with specifications
The ADAM-8000 is constructed and produced for:
• all Advantech ADAM-8000 components
• Communications and process control
• General control and automation applications
• Industrial applications
• operation within the environmental conditions specified in the technical
data
• installation into a cubicle
Danger!
This device is not certified for applications in
• in explosive environments (EX-zone)
Documentation
The manual must be available to all personnel in the
• project design department
• installation department
• commissioning
• operation
The following conditions must be met before using or commissioning
the components described in this manual:
• Modification to the process control system should only be carried out
when the system has been disconnected from power!
• Installation and modifications only by properly trained personnel
• The national rules and regulations of the respective country must be
satisfied (installation, safety, EMC ...)
Disposal
National rules and regulations apply to the disposal of the unit!
User considerations
3
User considerations
4
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Introduction
1
Introduction
Outline
The focus of this chapter is on the introduction of the Advantech ADAM8000. Various options of configuring central and decentralized systems are
presented in a summary.
The chapter also contains the general specifications of the ADAM-8000, i.e.
dimensions, installation and environmental conditions.
The chapter ends with a description of the 7-layer model and a table of the
communication levels available in automation technology.
Below follows a description of:
• Introduction of the ADAM-8000
• General information, i.e. installation, operational safety and environmental conditions
• 7-layer model and communication layers
1-2
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
1
Chapter
Overview
The System 200V
The ADAM-8000 is a modular automation system for centralized and
decentralized applications requiring low to medium performance specifications. The modules are installed directly on a DIN-rail. Bus connectors
inserted into the DIN-rail provide the interconnecting bus.
The following figure illustrates the capabilities of the ADAM-8000:
ADAM-8000
dezentral
zentral
,2 8
Profibus DeviceNet
CAN
2+ 8
Interbus
PC-CPU
525 8
SPS-CPU
for STEP® 5 of Siemens
SPS-CPU
for STEP® 7 of Siemens
Peripherie
Dig. IN / D ig. O UT / Anal. IN / A nal. O UT / FM / C P
Chapter 1 Introduction
1-3
Introduction
Components
Centralized system
The ADAM-8000 series consists of a number of PLC-CPUs. These are
programmed in STEP®5 of Siemens and they are compatible with existing
programs that are executable on the Siemens series 90U through 115U,
STEP®7 of Siemens or in accordance with IEC 61131-3.
CPUs that are fitted with integrated Ethernet interfaces or additional serial
interfaces simplify the integration of the PLC into an existing network or the
connection from additional peripheral equipment.
The application program is saved in Flash RAM or an additional plug-in
memory module.
With the appropriate expansion interface the ADAM-8000 can support up
to 4 rows.
Decentralized system
In combination with a Profibus DP-Master and -Slave the PLC-CPU’s or the
PC-CPU form the basis for a Profibus-DP network in accordance with DIN
19245-3. The DP network can be configured with any configuration tool.
Parameters are saved in a plug-in Flash ROM module.
The module can also be configured directly via the Profibus network by
means of the Advantech software WinNCS when this is used in conjunction with a Profibus-Master PC plug-in module that is available from the
company Softing. Alternatively, all Profibus modules are available with a
plastic FO-connector.
Other field-bus systems can be connected by means of slaves that can
interface with Interbus, CANopen and DeviceNet.
Peripheral modules
A large number of peripheral modules are available form Advantech, for
example digital as well as analog inputs/outputs, counter functions,
displacement sensors, positioners and serial communication modules.
These peripheral modules can be used in centralized as well as decentralized
mode.
1-4
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
1
General description ADAM-8000
Structure/dimensions
• Standard 35mm DIN-rail
• Peripheral modules with recessed labelling
• Dimensions of the basic enclosure:
1slot width: (H x W x D) in mm: 76 x 25,4 x 76 in inches: 3 x 1 x 3
2slot width: (H x W x D) in mm: 76 x 50,8 x 76 in inches: 3 x 2 x 3
Installation
Please note that you can only install header modules like the CPU, the PC
and couplers into plug-in location 1 or 1 and 2 (for double-width modules).
12
3
[1]
[2]
4
SM 221
IM 253 CAN
SM 221
DI 8 xDC2 4V
PW
SM 22 1
DI 8x DC24 V
1
SM 221
DI 8xDC2 4V
1
DI 8xDC2 4V
1
1
ER
.0
2
.0
2
.0
2
.0
2
RD
.1
3
.1
3
.1
3
.1
3
BA
.2
4
.2
4
.2
4
.2
4
.3
5
.3
5
.3
5
.3
5
.4
6
.4
6
.4
6
.4
6
ADR.
.5
01
.6
.7
DC24V
2
X 5
67
.5
7
.6
8
.7
9
I0
1
+
-
X 2
3 4
.5
7
.6
8
.7
9
I0
X 2
3 4
.5
7
.6
8
.7
9
I0
X 2
3 4
[3]
[4]
Header modules like
PC, CPU, bus
couplers
Double width header
module or
peripheral module
Peripheral module
Guide rails
7
8
9
I0
X 2
3 4
VIPA 2 53-1CA00 VIPA 221-1B F 00 VIPA 22 1-1B F0 0 VIPA 221-1 BF00 VIPA 221-1B F00
SM 221
PC 288
PW
D
V
M I
E
M
O
R
Y
K
B
D
RN
BA
OFF
NET
X2
34
VIPA 288-2BL10
DI 8x DC2 4V
1
1
2
.0
2
.0
2
.0
2
.1
3
.1
3
.1
3
.1
3
.2
4
.2
4
.2
4
.2
4
.3
5
.3
5
.3
5
.3
.4
6
.4
6
.4
6
.4
.5
7
.5
7
.5
7
.5
.6
8
.6
8
.6
8
.6
9
.7
9
.7
9
.7
I0
X2
34
SM 221
DI 8xDC2 4V
1
.0
.7
ON
SM 221
D I 8xDC 24V
1
M
O
U
S
E
D
C +
24 V
SM 221
DI 8xDC2 4 V
C
O
M
1
I0
X2
34
I0
X2
34
5
6
7
8
9
I0
X2
34
VIPA 2 2 1-1BF 00 VIPA 2 2 1-1 BF00 VIPA 2 21-1BF0 0 VIPA 2 21 -1 BF00
Reliability
• Wiring by means of spring pressure connections on the front, gauge 0,
8...2, 5 mm2 or 1, 5 mm2 (18-pole plug)
• Complete isolation of the wiring when modules are exchanged
• Every module is isolated from the back panel bus
• EMC resistance ESD/Burst in accordance with IEC 801-2 / IEC 801-4
through to level 3: 8 kV/2 kV
• Shock resistance in accordance with IEC 68-2-6 / IEC 68-2-27 (1G/12G)
Environmental conditions
•
•
•
•
Operating temperature: 0 ... +55°C
Storage temperature: -40 ... +85°C
Relative humidity: 95% without condensation
Ventilation by means of a fan is not required
Chapter 1 Introduction
1-5
Introduction
ISO/OSI reference model
Outline
The ISO/OSI reference model is based on a proposal that was developed by
the International Standards Organization (ISO). This represents the first
step towards an international standard for the different protocols. It is
referred to as the ISO-OSI model. OSI is the abbreviation for Open Systems
Interconnection, the communication between open systems. The ISO/OSI
reference model does not represent a network architecture as it does not
define the services and protocols used by the different layers. The model
simply specifies the tasks that the different layers must perform. All current
communication systems are based on the ISO/OSI reference model (OSI:
Open System Interconnection) which is defined by the ISO 7498 standard.
The reference model structures communication systems into 7 layers that
cover different communication tasks. In this manner the complexity of the
communication between different systems is divided amongst different
layers to simplify the task.
The following layers have been defined:
Layer
Function
Layer 7
Application Layer
Layer 6
Presentation Layer
Layer 5
Session Layer
Layer 4
Transport Layer
Layer 3
Network Layer
Layer 2
Data Link Layer
Layer 1
Physical Laye
Depending on the complexity and the requirements of the communication
mechanisms a communication system may use a subset of these layers.
Interbus-S and Profibus for instance only use layers 1 and 2. For this reason
the following paragraphs will be limited to a short description of these
layers.
1-6
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
1
Layers
Layer 1
Bit-communications layer (physical layer)
The bit-communications layer (physical layer) is concerned with the transfer
of data bits via the communication channel. This layer is therefore responsible for the mechanical, electrical and the procedural interfaces and the
physical communication medium located below the bit-communication layer:
• Which voltage represents a logical 0 or a 1.
• The minimum time that the voltage be present to be recognized as a bit.
• The pin assignment of the respective interface.
Layer 2
Security layer (data link layer)
This layer performs error-checking functions for bit strings transferred
between two communicating partners. This includes the recognition and
correction or flagging of communication errors and flow control functions.
The security layer (data link layer) converts raw communication data into a
sequence of frames. This is where frame boundaries are inserted on the
transmitting side and where the receiving side detects them. These boundaries consist of special bit patterns that are inserted at the beginning and at
the end of every frame. The security layer often also incorporates flow
control and error detection functions.
Layer 3 to 7
In accordance with Profibus these layers have not been implemented on the
bus couplers supplied by Advantech.
Chapter 1 Introduction
1-7
Introduction
Communication layers employed by automation systems
The flow of information in a company presents a vast spectrum of requirements that must be met by the communication systems. Depending on the
area of business the bus system or LAN must support a different number of
users, different volumes of data must be transferred and the intervals
between transfers may vary, etc.
It is for this reason that different bus systems are employed depending on
the respective task. These may be subdivided into different classes. The
following model depicts the relationship between the different bus systems
and the hierarchical structures of a company:
Operational layer
Management layer
Plant
computer
PPS CAD
Plant-oriented
control computer
manufacturing, stock,
production data
PPS CAD
System layer
Machine and control
computer
Process layer
Peripheral systems. machines, CNC, NC,
controllers (PLC), measuring systems
Sensor / actuator
layer
Fact ory bu s
MAP Broadba nd
TCP/IP
Cellular bus
MAP Carrierba nd
Peripheral components
sensor, actuator, regulator, multiplexer, operating consoles
H1
Field bus
Sensor / actuator
bus
It is common that very large volumes of data are transferred on the operational level that are not subject to timing restrictions. However, on the
lowest level, i.e. the sensor / actuator level, an efficient transfer of rather
small data volumes is essential. In addition, the bus system must often meet
real-time requirements on the sensor / actuator level.
1-8
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Profibus-DP
2
Profibus-DP
Overview
This chapter contains a description of Profibus applications of the ADAM8000. A short introduction and presentation of the system is followed by
the project design and configuration of the Profibus master and slave
modules that are available from Advantech. The chapter concludes with a
number of communication examples and the technical data.
Below follows a description of:
• System overview of the Profibus modules that are available from
Advantech
• The principles of Profibus DP
• The construction project design of the Profibus masters IM 208 DP
• The construction project design of the Profibus slaves IM 253 DP
• Sample projects
• Technical data
2-2
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
2
System overview
All ADAM-8K Profibus modules are available with an RS485 as well as a FO
connector. The following groups of Profibus modules are available at
present:
• Profibus-DP master
• Profibus-DP slave with address selector
• Profibus-DP slave with LC display for the selected address and diagnostics
• Profibus-DP slave combination module
• CPU 21x DP - CPU 21x with integrated Profibus-DP slave for the Siemens
S7 (refer to manual HB103).
Profibus-DP master
•
•
•
•
Profibus-DP master, class 1
Project design using WinNCS of Advantech
Project design by means of COM Profibus of Siemens is possible
Project-related data is saved in the internal Flash-ROM or stored on a
Flash-Memory card.
ADAM-8208-1DP01
ADAM-8208-2DP10
Chapter 2 Profibus
2-3
Profibus-DP
Ordering data DP master
Type
Order number
Descriptio
IM 208 DP
ADAM8208-1DP01
Profibus-DP master with RS485
IM 208 DPO
ADAM8208-2DP10
Profibus-DP master with FO connector
Profibus-DP slaves
• Version with RS485 interface or fiber optic connectors
• Online diagnostic protocol with time stamp
• DP slaves with an LCD are under development
Profibus-DP slave-combination modules
IM 253 DP
DO 24xDC24V
PW
ER
PW
RD
ER
DE
ADR.
9 9
DC24V
X 2
3 4
+
-
1
2
VIPA 253-2DP20
2-4
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
2
Chapter
Ordering data DP slaves
Type
Order number
Description
IM 253 DP
ADAM8253-1DP00
Profibus-DP slave with address selector
IM 253 DPO
ADAM8253-1DP10
Profibus-DP slave with address selector
and FO connector
Principles
General
Profibus is an international standard applicable to an open fieldbus for
building, manufacturing and process automation. Profibus defines the
technical and functional characteristics of a serial fieldbus system that can
be used to create a low (sensor-/actuator level) or medium (process level)
performance network of programmable logic controllers. Profibus comprises
an assortment of compatible versions. The following details refer to
Profibus-DP.
Profibus-DP
Profibus-DP is a special protocol intended mainly for automation tasks in a
manufacturing environment. DP is very fast, offers Plug and Play facilities
and provides a cost-effective alternative to a parallel bus between PLC’s
and decentralised peripherals. Profibus-DP was designed for high-speed
data communications on the sensor-actuator level.
The data transfer referred to as “Data Exchange” is cyclical. The master
reads input values from the slaves and writes output information to the
slave in one single bus cycle.
Master and slaves
Profibus distinguishes between active stations (master) and passive
stations (slave).
Master devices
Master devices control the communications on the bus. It is also possible
to operate with multiple masters on a Profibus. This is referred to as
multimaster operation. The protocol on the bus establishes a logical
Tokenring between intelligent devices connected to the bus. Only the
master that has the token can communicate with its slaves.
Chapter 2 Profibus
2-5
Profibus-DP
A master (IM 208 DP or IM 208 DPO) is able to issue unsolicited messages
if it is in possession of the access key (token). The Profibus protocol also
refers to masters as active participants.
Slave-devices
A Profibus slave acquires data from peripheral equipment, sensors, drives
and transducers. The Advantech Profibus couplers (IM 253 DP, IM 253
DPO and the CPU 21x DP) are modular slave devices that transfer data
between the ADAM-8000 periphery and the high-level master.
In accordance with the Profibus-standards these devices have no bus
access rights. They are only allowed to acknowledge messages or return
messages to a master when this has issued a request. Slaves are also
referred to as passive participants.
Communications
The bus transfer protocol provides two alternatives for the access to the
bus:
Master with master
Master communications is also referred to as token-passing procedure. The
token-passing procedure guarantees the accessibility of the bus. The
permission to access the bus is transferred between individual devices in
the form of a “token”. The token is a special message that is transferred via
the bus.
When a master is in possession of the token it has the permission to access
the bus and it can communicate with any active or passive device. The
token retention time is defined when the system is being configured. Once
the token retention time has expired the token is passed to the following
master which now has permission to access the bus and may therefore
communicate with any other device.
Master-slave procedure
Data communications between a master and the slaves assigned to it is
conducted automatically in a predefined and repetitive cycle by the master.
You assign a slave to a specific master when you define the project. You
can also define which DP-slaves are included and which are excluded from
the cyclic exchange of data.
Data communications between master and slave can be divided into a
definition, a configuration and a data transfer phase. Before a DP slave is
2-6
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
2
included in the data transfer phase the master checks die whether the
defined configuration corresponds with the actual configuration. This
check is performed during the definition and configuration phase. The
verification includes the device type, format and length information as well
as the number of inputs and outputs. In this way a reliable protection from
configuration errors is achieved.
The master handles the transfer of application related data independently
and automatically. You can, however, also send new configuration settings
to a bus couplers.
When the status of the master is DE “Data Exchange” it transmits a new
series of output data to the slave and the reply received from the slave
contains the latest input data.
Data transfer operation
Data is transferred cyclically between the DP master and the DP slave by
means of transmit and receive buffers.
DP-Master
Input
Output
Profibus DP
DP-Slave with I/O-Modules
Communication
Processor
V-Bus
send buffer
I/O Modules
PE
PA
receive buffer
DP cycle
V-Bus cycle
PE: process image of the inputs
PA: process image of the outputs
Chapter 2 Profibus
2-7
Profibus-DP
V-bus cycle
A V-bus cycle saved all the input data from the modules in the PE and all
the output data from the PA in the output modules. When the data has been
saved the PE is transferred into the ”send buffer” and the contents of the
”receive buffers” is transferred into PA.
DP cycle
During a Profibus cycle the master addresses all its slaves according to the
sequence defined in the data exchange. The data exchange reads and writes
data from/into the memory-areas assigned the Profibus.
The contents of the Profibus input area is entered into the ”receive buffer”
and the data in the ”send buffer” is transferred into the Profibus outputarea.
The exchange of data between DP master and DP slave is completed
cyclically and it is independent from the V-bus cycle.
V-bus cycle ≤ DP-cycle
To ensure that the data-transfer is synchronized the V-bus cycle-time
should always be less than or equal to the DP cycle-time.
The parameter is located in the GSD-file.
min_slave_interval = 3ms.
In an average system it is guaranteed that the Profibus-data on the V-bus is
updated after a max. time of 3ms. You can therefore exchange data with the
slave at intervals of 3ms.
Note!
When the V-bus cycle time exceeds the DP-cycle time the RUN-LED on
the Advantech-Profibus slave is extinguished.
This function is supported as of hardware revision level 6.
Data consistency
The Advantech Profibus-DP masters provide ”word-consistency”!
Consistent data is the term used for data that belongs together by virtue of
its contents. This is the high and the low byte of an analogue value (word
consistency) as well as the control and status byte along with the respective parameter word for access to the registers.
2-8
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
2
The data consistency as applicable to the interaction between the periphery
and the controller is only guaranteed for 1 byte. This means that input and
output of the bits of a byte occurs together. This byte consistency suffices
when digital signals are being processed.
Where the data length exceeds a byte, for example in analogue values, the
data consistency must be extended. Profibus guarantees that the consistency will cater for the required length.
Restrictions
• A max. of 125 DP-slaves are supported by one DP-master - a max. of 32
slaves/segment
• You can only install or remove peripheral modules when you have
turned the power off!
• The max. distance for RS485 cables between two stations is 1200m
(depending on the Baud rate)
• The max. distance for FO based connections between two stations is 50 m
• The maximum Baud rate is 12 MBaud
• The Profibus-address of operational modules must never be changed.
Diagnostics
Profibus-DP provides an extensive set of diagnostic functions for quick
location of faults. Diagnostic messages are transferred via the bus and
collected by the master.
Data communications medium
Profibus employs Screened twisted pair cable on the basis of the RS485
interfaces or a duplex fiber optic link (FO). The data transfer rate of both
systems is limited to a max. of 12 MB aud.
For details please refer to the “Installation guidelines”.
Electrical system based on RS485
The RS485 interface uses differential voltages. It is for this reason that this
interface is less susceptible to interference than a plain voltage or current
based interface. The network may be configured as a daisy-chain or in a tree
configuration. Your Advantech Profibus coupler carries a 9-pin socket. This
socket is used to connect the Profibus coupler to the Profibus network as a
slave.
Chapter 2 Profibus
2-9
Profibus-DP
Due to the bus structure of RS-485 any station may be connected or
disconnected without interruptions and a system can be commissioned in
different stages. Extensions to the system do not affect stations that have
already been commissioned. Any failures of stations or new devices are
detected automatically.
Optical system using fiber optic data links
The fiber optic system employs pulses of monochromatic light. The fiber
optic cable can be used in the same manner as any normal cable and it is not
susceptible to external electrical interference. Fiber optic systems have a
linear structure. Each device requires two lines, a transmit and a receive line.
It is not necessary to provide a terminator at the last device.
Due to the linear structure of the FO data link it is not possible to install or
remove stations without interruption to data communications.
Addressing
Every device on the Profibus is identified by an address. This address must
be unique in each bus system and may be a number anywhere between 0
and 125. The address of the Advantech Profibus coupler is set by the
addressing switch located on the front of the module.
You must assign the address to the Advantech Profibus master during the
configuration phase.
GSD-file
For configuration purposes you will receive a GSD-file containing the
performance specifications of Advantech Profibus couplers. The structure,
contents and coding of the GSD file are defined by the Profibus user
organization (PNO) and are available from this organization.
The GSD-file for Advantech Profibus-DP slaves is named: DP2V0550.GSD
Install this GSD file into your configuration tool. You can obtain more
detailed information on the installation of GSD files from the manual
supplied with your configuration tool.
2-10
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
2
Construction of the IM 208 - DP master with RS485
Properties
• Class 1 Profibus-DP master
• 125 DP slaves can be connected to a DP master.
• Inserts the data areas of the slaves located on the V-bus into the
addressing area of the CPU 24x
• Diagnostic facilities
Front view IM 208 DP
IM 208 DP
RN
ST
MR
1
M
M
C
3
[1]
PW
ER
RN
2
4
DE
IF
[2]
[3]
[4]
Operating mode switch
RUN/STOP
LED status indicators
Slot for memory card
RS485 interface
X 2
34
ADAM-8208-1DP01
Components LED’s
The module carries a number of LED’s that are available for diagnostic
purposes on the bus and for displaying the local status. The following table
explains the different colors of the diagnostic LED’s.
Designation Color
PW
ER
Explanatio
yellow Indicates that the supply voltage is available on the back panel bus
red
RN
green
DE
yellow
IF
red
On when a slave has failed (ERROR)
If RN is the only LED that is on, then the master status is RUN. The
slaves are being accessed and the outputs are 0 (“clear” state)
If both RN+DE are on the status of the Master is “operate”. It is
communicating with the slaves.
DE (Data exchange) indicates Profibus communication activity
Initialization error for bad configurations
Chapter 2 Profibus
2-11
Profibus-DP
RS485 interface
The ADAM-8000 Profibus master is connected to your Profibus network
via the 9- pin socket.
The following figure shows the assignment of the individual pins
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Assignmen
shield
n.c.
RxD/TxD-P
CNTR-P
GND
5 V (70 mA max.)
n.c.
RxD/TxD-N
n.c.
Power supply
The Profibus master receives power via the back panel bus.
Operating mode selector
The operating mode selector is used to select operating modes STOP (ST)
or RUN (RN).
The master will change to RUN mode if the operating mode selector is set to
RN and parameters are acceptable.
When the operating mode switch is set to ST the master will change to
STOP mode. In this mode all communications are terminated and the
outputs of the allocated slaves will be set to 0 if the parameters are valid
and the master issues an alarm to the controlling system.
The chapter on ”Operating modes” contains a detailed explanation of the
change between RUN and STOP mode.
In position MR you can activate a download-mode for the transfer of your
project data. For details, please refer to the section on “Transferring a
project” below.
MMC as external storage medium
The Advantech MMC memory card is employed as an external storage
medium. You can transfer your project-related data from the internal FlashROM into this memory card by means of the command “copy RAM to
ROM” of the Siemens Hardware Manager.
2-12
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
2
You initiate the transfer of project data from the MMC into the master by
setting the operating mode selector into position MR. For details, please
refer to the section on “Transferring a project” below.
Operating modes
Power On
The IM 208 interface is powered on. The configuration data is read from the
memory card, the validity is verified and the data is stored in the internal
RAM of the IM 208.
The master will change to RUN-mode automatically when the operating
mode switch is in position RUN and the parameters are valid. In run-mode
the LED’s RN, DE and ER are turned on. The ER-LED is extinguished when
all the configured slaves are available via data exchange.
STOP
In STOP mode the outputs of the allocated slaves will be set to 0 if the
parameters are valid. Although no communications will take place, the
master will remain active on the bus using current bus parameters and
occupying the allocated bus address. To release the address the Profibus
plug must be removed from the IM 208 interface.
STOP à RUN
In the RN position the master will re-boot: configuration data and bus
parameters are retrieved from the memory card and saved into the internal
RAM of the IM 208.
Next, the communication link to the slaves is established. At this time only
the RN-LED will be on. Once communications has been established by
means of valid bus parameters the IM 208 will change to RUN mode. The
master interface displays this status by means of the LED’s RN and DE.
The IM 208 will remain in the STOP mode and display a configuration error
by means of the IF-LED if the parameters are bad or if the memory card was
not inserted. The interface will then be active on the bus using the following default bus parameters:
Default-Bus-Parameter: address:1, communication rate:1,5 MBaud.
Chapter 2 Profibus
2-13
Profibus-DP
RUN
In RUN mode the RN- and DE-LED’s are on. In this condition data
transfers can take place. If an error should occur, e.g. slave defective, the
IM 208 will indicate the event by means of the ER-LED and it will issue an
alarm to the system on the next higher level.
RUN à STOP
The master is placed in STOP mode. It terminates communications and all
outputs are set to 0. An alarm is issued to the system on the next higher
level.
Configuration of IM 208 - DP master with RS485
General
You can use the function ”Profibus” of the Advantech configuration tool
WinNCS to configure the IM 208 master and the respective slaves.
The module transfer functions available in WinNCS provide many options
for the data transfer to your master module.
System 200V CPU applications
The IM 208 master modules can be used to connect up to 125 Profibus DP
slaves to a Advantech ADAM-8000 CPU. The master communicates with
the slaves and maps the data areas into the memory map of the CPU via the
back panel bus. Input and output data are limited to a maximum of 256 byte
each.
The CPU retrieves the I/O mapping data from all connected masters when
the CPU is re-started.
Alarm processing is active, i.e. an error message from the IM 208 can STOP
the CPU
The ER-LED is turned on if a slave should fail. If the delayed acknowledgment (QVZ) parameter was configured for a slave, a dropped acknowledgment will STOP the CPU. If QVZ has not been configured the CPU will
continue running
When the BASP signal is available from the CPU the IM 208 sets the
outputs of the connected periphery to zero.
Note!
Refer to the documentation for your CPU for details on the interfacing
requirements of the CPU.
2-14
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
2
Configuration under WinNCS
The Profibus master can be configured by means of the Advantech
WinNCS configuration tool.
The WinNCS configuration procedure is outlined below:
1. Start WinNCS and create a new project file for the ”Profibus” function by clicking
on File > create/open.
2.
If you have not yet done so, use
to insert a Profibus function group
into the network window and click [Accept] in the parameter box.
3.
Use
to insert a Profibus host/master into the network window and
specify the Profibus address of your master in the parameter window
4.
Insert a Profibus slave into the network window by means of
. Enter
the Profibus address, the family “I/O” and the station type “DP200V” into the
parameter window and click [Accept].
5.
Use
to define the configuration of every peripheral module that is
connected to the corresponding slave via the back panel bus. You can select
automatic addressing for the periphery by clicking [Auto] and display allocated
addresses by means of [MAP]. For intelligent modules like the CP240 the
configurable parameters will be displayed
6. When you have configured all the slaves with the respective periphery the bus
parameters for Profibus must be calculated
Select the Profibus function group In the network window. In the parameter
window click on the “Busparameter” tab in the parameter window. Select the
required baud rate and click [calculate]. The bus parameters will be calculated [Accept] these values.
The bus parameters must be re-calculated with every change to the set of
modules!
7. Activate the master-level in the network window and export your project into a
2bf-file.
8. Transfer the 2bf-file into your IM208 master (see “Transferring a project “)
Chapter 2 Profibus
2-15
Profibus-DP
Transferring a project
Overview
The transfer from your PC into the IM 208 DP-Master is performed by the
“Green Cable” that is available form Advantech. You can transfer your
project from your PC via the Profibus interface into the internal Flash-ROM
of the IM 208 DP Master.
You can transfer the contents of the internal Flash-ROM into the MMC by
means of the command “Copy RAM into ROM” of the Siemens STEP®7
Manager.
You can initiate a data transfer from the MMC into the internal Flash-ROM
by means of the operating mode switch.
It is not possible to boot directly from the MMC.
Using the “Green Cable” to transfer a project
You can transfer your projects from your PC into your IM 208 DP Master by
means of the “Green Cable”. The “Green Cable” is available from Advantech under order no.: ADAM8950-0KB00.
Requirements
You have configured the Profibus system and exported your project to a
2bf-file.
Procedure
• Connect the “Green Cable” to the serial interface of your PC and to the
Profibus interface of the IM 208 DP master.
• Hold the operating mode switch of the Profibus master in position MR
and turn the power supply on, only the PW-LED will light up on the
Profibus master.
• Release the operating mode switch. ¡÷Now your Profibus master can
receive serial Data via the Profibus interface.
• Turn your PC on and start the SIP tool that is supplied with WinNCS.
Select the appropriate COM-port and establish a connection by means
of [Connect]. When the connection has been established the SIP tool
will display OK in the status line located at the top, otherwise an ERR
message will be displayed.
• Click [Download], select your 2bf-file and transfer this file into the DPmaster
2-16
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
2
• Terminate the connection and the SIP tool when the data has been
transferred.
• Disconnect the “Green Cable” from the Master.
• Turn off the power supply of your master.
• Connect the master to the Profibus network and turn the power supplyon again.
• Change the operating mode of the master to RUN. àYour IM 208 DP
Profibus master is now connected to the network with the updated
configuration. The configuration data is saved in the internal FlashROM. This data can now be transferred into the MMC memory card.
ADAM-8000
ADAM-8000
ADAM-8000
Chapter 2 Profibus
2-17
Profibus-DP
Transferring data from the internal Flash-ROM to the MMC
At present the only method to transfer the data from the internal Flash-ROM
into the MMC is by means of the write command of the Siemens STEP ®7
Manager in conjunction with a ADAM-8000 CPU 21x. Additional options will
be available shortly.
Requirements
The internal Flash-ROM of your IM 208 DP-master contains a project.
Procedure
• Connect your PC to the MPI-interface of the VIPA CPU 21x by means of
the “Green Cable”. The MPI-interface of the VIPA CPU 21x performs an
internal RS232/MPI conversion when it is connected to the “Green
Cable”.
• Turn o the power to your ADAM-8000.
• Insert a MMC into the Profibus master.
• Start the Siemens STEP® 7 Manager.
• The sequence Target system > Copy RAM to ROM transfers the data
from internal Flash-ROM of the master into the MMC. When this
operation has completed the MMC can be removed.
Transferring data from the MMC into an internal Flash-ROM
Requirements
A project is available in the MMC.
2-18
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
2
Procedure
• Insert the MMC memory module into your IM 208 DP-Master
• Turn on the power supply of your ADAM-8000.
• Place and hold the operating mode switch of your master module in
position MR. Hold this position until the RN-LED blinks.
• Release the switch and trigger the MR position again for a short period
of time. à The data is transferred from the MMC into the internal FlashROM. The master indicates this status by turning the RN-LED on. The
data transfer is complete when the RN-LED is turned off.
• At this point you can remove the MMC.
• Switch the master from STOP to RUN. à The IM 208 DP-Master will
start with the new project located in the internal Flash-ROM.
ADAM-8000
Power On
Chapter 2 Profibus
2-19
Profibus-DP
Construction of the IM 208 - DP master with a FO link
Properties
• Class 1 Profibus-DP-Master
• 125 DP-slaves can be connected to a DP master
• Project configuration by means of ADAM-WinNCS or Siemens ComProfibus
• Diagnostic facilities
Front view IM 208 DPO
IM 208 DPO
[1]
RN
1
PW
ST
[2]
[3]
[4]
ER
2
RN
Operating mode switch
RUN/STOP
LED status indicator
FO-interface
Memory card slot
DE
IF
4
3
X2
3 4
ADAM-8208-IDP10
Components
LED’s
The module carries a number of LED’s that are available for diagnostic
purposes on the bus and for displaying the local status. The following table
explains the significance of the different colors of the diagnostic LED’s.
Designation Color Explanatio
PW
2-20
yellow Indicates that the supply voltage is available on the back panel bus.
ER
red
RN
green
DE
yellow
IF
red
On when a slave has failed (ERROR).
When only the RN LED is on, then the master status is RUN. The
slaves are being accessed and the outputs are 0 (“clear” state)
If both RN+DE are on the status of the Master is “operate”. It is
communicating with the slaves.
DE (Data exchange) indicates Profibus communication activity.
Initialization error for bad configurations
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
2
FO link interface
This socket is provided for the fiber optic connection between your
Profibus coupler and the Profibus. The figure shows the connections for
this interface.
Power supply
The Profibus master receives power via the back panel bus.
Operating mode selector
The operating mode selector is used to select operating modes STOP (ST)
or RUN (RN).
When the operating mode switch is placed in position RN and the parameters are valid the master changes to RUN mode.
When the operating mode switch is placed in position ST the master
changes to STOP mode. . It terminates communications and all outputs are
set to 0. An alarm is issued to the system on the next higher level.
This chapter contains a detailed explanation under the heading ”Operating
modes”.
Flash Memory Card
You can insert a Flash Memory Card into this slot to transfer your configurations.
When you are using a PG with a slot for a Memory Card you can save your
project directly into the memory card.
Applications in the IM 208
You may insert or remove the memory card from your IM 208 when the
status is RUN and/or STOP. When the IM 208 receives power while the
memory card is inserted or when the operating mode switch is changed from
ST to RN the configuration data and bus parameters are transferred from the
memory card into the internal RAM of the IM 208.
You can obtain detailed information on the data transfer into and from your
master under the heading “Configuration of IM 208 - DP master”.
Chapter 2 Profibus
2-21
Profibus-DP
Operating modes
Power On
Power is applied to the IM 208-interface. Configuration data is retrieved
from the memory card, verified, and saved into the internal RAM of the IM
208.
The master will automatically change to RUN mode if the operating mode
selector is set to RUN and parameters are acceptable. In RUN mode the
LED’s RN, DE and ER are on. As soon as all configured slaves are available
in the data exchange the ER-LED is extinguished.
STOP
In STOP mode the outputs of the allocated slaves will be set to 0 if the
parameters are valid. Although no communications will take place, the
master will remain active on the bus using current bus parameters and
occupying the allocated bus address. To release the address the Profibus
plug must be removed from the IM 208 interface.
STOP à RUN
In the RN position the master will re-boot: configuration data and bus
parameters are retrieved from the memory card and saved into the internal
RAM of the IM 208.
Next, the communication link to the slaves is established. At this time only
the RN-LED will be on. Once communications has been established by
means of valid bus parameters the IM 208 will change to RUN mode. The
master interface displays this status by means of the LED’s RN and DE.
The IM 208 will remain in the STOP mode and display a configuration error
by means of the IF-LED if the parameters are bad or if the memory card was
not inserted. The interface will then be active on the bus using the following default bus parameters:
Default-Bus-Parameter: address:1, communication rate:1,5 MBaud.
RUN
In RUN mode the RN- and DE-LED’s are on. In this condition data transfers
can take place. If an error should occur, e.g. slave defective, the IM 208 will
indicate the event by means of the ER-LED and it will issue an alarm to the
system on the next higher level.
RUN à STOP
The master is placed in STOP mode. It terminates communications and all
outputs are set to 0. An alarm is issued to the system on the next higher
level.
2-22
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
2
Configuration of IM 208 - DP-Master with FO-link
General
You can configure the IM 208 master and the peripherals associated with
the slaves by means of the “Profibus” functionality of the Advantech
WinNCS configuration tool.
The block transfer functions of WinNCS provide many different methods
for transferring data to your master module.
Applications in conjunction with ADAM-8000 CPU
IM 208 master modules can be used to connect up to 125 Profibus DP
slaves to a ADAM-8000 CPU. The master communicates with the slaves
and maps the data areas into the memory map of the CPU via the back panel
bus. Input and output data are limited to a maximum of 256 byte each.
The master automatically fetches the I/O mapping data from all the masters
when the CPU is re-started.
Alarm processing is active, i.e. an error message from the IM 208 can STOP
the CPU.
The ER-LED is turned on if a slave should fail. If the delayed acknowledgment (QVZ) parameter was configured for a slave, a dropped acknowledgment will STOP the CPU. If QVZ has not been configured the CPU will
continue running.
As soon as the BASP signal is available from the CPU the IM 208 sets the
outputs of the connected periphery to zero.
Note!
Please refer to the documentation of your CPU for details on the interfacing
requirements of your CPU.
Chapter 2 Profibus
2-23
Profibus-DP
Configuration by means of WinNCS
The VIPA configuration tool WinNCS provides a user-friendly method for
the configuration of your Profibus master.
Here follows a short outline of the configuration sequence under WinNCS:
1. Start WinNCS and create a new project file for the ”Profibus” function by clicking
on File > create/open.
2.
If you have not yet done so, use
to insert a Profibus function group
into the network window and click [Accept] in the parameter box.
3.
Use
to insert a Profibus host/master into the network window and
specify the Profibus address of your master in the parameter window.
4.
Insert a Profibus slave into the network window by means of
. Enter
the Profibus address, the family “I/O” and the station type “DP200V” into the
parameter window and click [Accept].
5.
Use
to define the configuration of every peripheral module that is
connected to the corresponding slave via the back panel bus. You can select
automatic addressing for the periphery by clicking [Auto] and display allocated
addresses by means of [MAP]. For intelligent modules like the CP240 the
configurable parameters will be displayed.
6. When you have configured all the slaves with the respective periphery the bus
parameters for Profibus must be calculated. Select the Profibus function group
In the network window. In the parameter window click on the “Busparameter” tab
in the parameter window. Select the required baud rate and click [calculate]. The
bus parameters will be calculated - [Accept] these values.
The bus parameters must be re-calculated with every change to the set of
modules!
7. Activate the master-level in the network window and export your project into a
2bf-file.
8. Transfer the 2bf-file into your IM208 master. You have three possibilities for the
data transfer between your PC and the IM208 master. The basis for all three is a
2bf-file that is created by means of the export function of WinNCS (see the
following pages)
2-24
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
2
Transferring a project
Overview
Three different options are available to transfer data between your PC and
the Profibus master:
• transfer via an EPROM programmer into a Flash-Card
• transfer via Profibus-PC master adapter
• transfer via SIP-Tool (supplied with WinNCS)
All three options require a 2BF-file that is created by means of the export
function of WinNCS.
Transfer via EPROM programmer into a Flash-Card
You require a Memory Card and an external EPROM programmer with
software to transfer your configuration into your ADAM-8000 Profibus
master. The Memory Card is available from Advantech under the order no.:
Advantech 374-1KH21.
You can read the 2bf-file into the EPROM programmer and program your
Flash-Card.
Transfer via Profibus-PC card
WinNCS can also be used to transfer the data via a Master-PC adapter
manufactured by Softing. This adapter can be used to establish a mastermaster link via Profibus. You can then transfer your 2bf-file by means of the
module transfer functions
in both directions.
Transfer via SIP-Tool
Advantech can also supply a serial cable. This cable can be used to transfer
the 2bf-file by means of the SIP-Tool into the IM208 master. The program
SIP.EXE is supplied with WinNCS and it is located on the directory
WinNCS\SIP.
Chapter 2 Profibus
2-25
Profibus-DP
Note!
For details on the data transfer by means of WinNCS refer to the section
“Data transfer” in the chapter “Profibus functionality” of the manual
supplied with WinNCS.
Construction IM 253 - DP-Slave
Properties
• Profibus-DP slave for a max. of 32 peripheral modules (a max. of 16
analog modules)
• A max. of 152 bytes of input data and 152 bytes output data
• Internal diagnostic protocol with a time stamp
• Integrated 24 VDC power supply for the peripheral modules (3 A max.)
• Supports all Profibus data transfer rates
Front view ADAM8253-1DP00
IM 253 DP
[1]
[2]
[3]
PW
ER
1
4
RD
[4]
DE
2
LED status indicators
Address selector
Connector for 24V DC power
supply
RS485 interface
9 9
ADR.
DC24V
3
X 2
34
+
-
1
2
ADAM-8253-1DP00
Front view ADAM8253-1DP10
IM 253 DPO
[1]
[2]
[3]
PW
ER
1
4
RD
DE
2
ADR.
3
+
-
99
DC24V
X2
34
1
2
ADAM-8253-1DP10
2-26
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
[4]
LED status indicators
Address selector
Connector for 24V DC power
supply
FO interface
Chapter
2
Components
LED’s
The module carries a number of LED’s that are available for diagnostic
purposes on the bus and for displaying the local status. The following table
explains the different colors of the diagnostic LED’s.
Designation Color Explanatio
PW
yellow Indicates that the supply voltage is available on the back panel bus.
(Power).
ER
red
Turned on and off again when a restart occurs.
Is turned on when an internal error has occurred.
Blinks when an initialization error has occurred.
Alternates with RD when the master configuration is bad configuration
error).
Blinks in time with RD when the configuration is bad.
RD
green
Is turned on when the status is “Data exchange” and the V-bus cycle
is faster than the Profibus cycle.
Is turned off when the status is “Data exchange” and the V-bus cycle
is slower than the Profibus cycle.
Blinks when self-test is positive (READY) and the initialization has
been completed successfully.
Alternates with ER when the configuration received from the master is
bad (configuration error).
Blinks in time with ER when the configuration is bad.
DE
yellow
DE (Data exchange) indicates Profibus communications activity
RS485 interface
A 9-pin socket is provided for the RS485 interface between your Profibus
slave and the Profibus.
The following diagram shows the pin-assignment for this interface:=
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Assignmen
shield
n.c.
RxD/TxD-P
CNTR-P
GND
5 V (70 mA max.)
n.c.
RxD/TxD-N
n.c.
Chapter 2 Profibus
2-27
Profibus-DP
FO interface
These connectors are provided for the fiber optic link between your
Profibus coupler and the Profibus.
The diagram shows the layout of the interface:
Address selector
This address selector is used to configure the address for the Bus-coupler.
Addresses may range from 1 to 99. Addresses must be unique on the bus.
When the address is set to 00 a once-off image of the diagnostic data is
saved to Flash-ROM.
The slave address must have been selected before the bus coupler is turned
on.
Attention!
The address must never be changed when the unit is running!
Power supply
Every Profibus slave coupler has an internal power supply. This power
supply requires 24V DC. In addition to the electronics on the bus coupler
the supply voltage is also used to power any modules connected to the
back panel bus. Please note that the maximum current that the integrated
power supply can deliver to the back panel bus is 3A.
The power supply is protected against reverse polarity.
Profibus and back panel bus are galvanically isolated.
Attention!
Please ensure that the polarity is correct when connecting the power
supply!
2-28
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
2
Block diagram
The block diagram below shows the hardware structure of the bus coupler
as well as the internal communication paths:
galvanic isolation
(by means of opto couplers and
DC/DC converter)
RS 485
Profibus-DP
Data
Exchange
Microcontroller bus
Profibus
Controller
Clock
EPROM
Reset
Error
Ready
Microcontroller
Clock
Voltage
monitoring
Reset
Address
selector
ADAM-8000
interface
Power
24V
(terminals)
Power
supply
24V / 5V
+5V
ADAM-8000
back panel bus
Chapter 2 Profibus
2-29
Profibus-DP
Configuration IM 253 - DP-Slave
General
The module is configured by means of the Profibus master configuration
tool. During the configuration you will assign the required Profibus slave
modules to your master module.
The direct allocation is defined by means of the Profibus address that you
must set up on the slave module.
GSD file
VIPA supplies a diskette with every Profibus module. This diskette contains
all the GSD and type files of the Advantech Profibus modules.
Please install the required files from your diskette into your configuration
tool. Details on the installation of the GSD and/or type files are available
from the manual supplied with your configuration tool.
The Advantech WinNCS configuration tool contains all GSD files!
Configuration by means of WinNCS
1
means of
. Start WinNCS and configure a master system by
. For details refer to “Configuration of IM 208 - DP master” above.
3
and .
4. Insert a Profibus slave into the network box by means of . Enter the Profibus
address, the family “I/O” and the station type “DP200V” into the parameter
window and click [Accept]
5. Use to define the configuration of every peripheral module that is connected to
the corresponding slave via the back panel bus. You can select automatic
addressing for the periphery by clicking [Auto] and display allocated addresses
by means of [MAP]. For intelligent modules like the CP240 the configurable
parameters will be displayed
6. Continue as described in the chapter under “Configuration of IM 208 - DP
master”
In a configuration employing Profibus slave combination modules, e.g. the
Advantech ADAM8253-2DP20 you must define the same parameters as
indicated in table 4 above. When enter the configuration of your peripheral
modules (5.) you must select the module type “ADAM8253-2DP20”
2-30
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
2
Diagnostic functions of the Profibus-DP slaves
Overview
Profibus-DP provides an extensive set of diagnostic functions for quick
location of faults. Diagnostic messages are transferred via the bus and
collected by the master.
The most recent 100 diagnostic messages along with a time stamp are
stored in RAM and saved to the Flash ROM of every Advantech Profibus
slave. These can be investigated by means of software or displayed via the
LC display (under development).
Internal diagnostic System messages
The system also stores diagnostic messages like the status “Ready” or
“Data Exchange”. These are not sent to the master.
The contents of the diagnostic RAM is saved by the Profibus slave in a
Flash-ROM when the status changes between “Ready” and “Data Exchange”. After every restart it retrieves this data and deposits it in RAM.
Saving diagnostic data manually
You can manually save the diagnostic data in Flash-ROM by changing the
address switch setting to 00 for a short while.
Diagnostic message in case of a power failure
When a power failure or a voltage drop is detected a time stamp is saved in
the EEPROM. In the case that the available power should be adequate the
diagnostic is transferred to the master.
The time stamp in the EEPROM is used to generate an under voltage/
power-off diagnostic message at the time of the next restart and saved to
the diagnostic-RAM.
Direct diagnostics of the Profibus slave module
If you are employing Advantech Profibus slaves you can transfer the latest
diagnostic data directly from the module into your PC for analysis by means
of the download cable and the “Slave info Tool” software that are available
form Advantech.
Chapter 2 Profibus
2-31
Profibus-DP
Structure of the Profibus diagnostic data
The length of the diagnostic messages that are generated by the Profibus
slave is 23 bytes. This is also referred to as the device- related diagnostic
data.
When the Profibus slave sends a diagnostic message to the master a 6 byte
standard diagnostic block and 1 byte header is prepended to the 23 byte
diagnostic data:
only for Profibus transfers
byte 0 ... byte 5 Standard diagnostic data
precedes message to master
byte 6 Header device-related diagnostics
byte 7 ... 29 Device-related diagnostic data
Diagnostic data that is saved
internally.
Standard diagnostic data
Diagnostic data that is being transferred to the Master consists of the
standard diagnostic data for slaves and a header byte that are prepended to
the device-related diagnostic bytes.
The Profibus standards contain more detailed information on the structure
of standard diagnostic data. These standards are available from the
Profibus User Organization.
The structure of the standard diagnostic data for slaves is as follows:
Byte
2-32
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
0
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
0: permanently 0
1: slave not ready for data exchange
2: configuration data mismatch
3: slave has external diagnostic data
4: slave does not support the requested function
5: permanently 0
6: bad configuration
7: permanently 0
1
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
0: slave requires re-configuration
1: statistical diagnostics
2: permanently 1
3: watchdog active
4: freeze-command was received
5: sync-command was received
6: reserved
7: permanently 0
2
Bit 0 ... Bit 6: reserved
Bit 7: diagnostic data overflow
3
Master address after configuration
FFh: slave was not configured
4
Ident number high byte
5
Ident number low byte
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
2
Header for device-related diagnostics
These bytes are only prepended to the device-related diagnostic data when
this is being transferred via Profibus.
Byte
6
Bit 7 ... Bit
Bit 0 ... Bit 5: Length device-related diagnostic data incl. byte
Bit 6 ... Bit 7: permanently 0
Device-related diagnostics
Byte
7 ... 29
Bit 7 ... Bit
Device-related diagnostic data that can be stored internally by the slave for
analysis.
Structure of the device related diagnostic data in the DP slave
As of revision level 6 all diagnostic data that is generated by the Profibus
slave is stored in a ring-buffer along with the time stamp. The ring-buffer
always contains the most recent 100 diagnostic messages.
You can analyze these messages by means of the “Slave Info Tool”. Since
the standard diagnostic data (byte 0 ... byte 5) and the header (byte 6) are
not stored the data in byte 0 ... byte 23 corresponds to byte 7 ... byte 30 that
is transferred via Profibus.
The structure of the device-related diagnostic data is as follows:
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit
0
Messag
0Ah: DP parameter error
14h: DP configuration error length
15h: DP configuration error entry
1Eh: under voltage/power failure
28h: V-bus configuration error
29h: V-bus initialization error
2Ah: V-bus bus error
2Bh: V-bus delayed acknowledgment
32h: diagnostic alarm system 200
33h: process alarm system 200
3Ch: new DP-address was defined
3Dh: Slave status is ready (only internally)
3Eh: Slave status is Data_Exchange (only internally)
1
Module-No. or plug-in location
1 ... 32: Module-No. or plug-in location
0: Module-No. or plug-in location not available
2 ... 23
Additional information for message in byte
Chapter 2 Profibus
2-33
Profibus-DP
Overview of diagnostic-messages
The following section contains all the messages that the diagnostic data
can consist of. The structure of byte 2 ... byte 23 depends on the message
(byte 0). When the diagnostic data is transferred to the master via Profibus
byte 7 of the master corresponds to byte 0 of the slave. The specified
length represents the “length of the diagnostic data” during the Profibus
data transfer.
0Ah
DP parameter error
Length: 8
The parameter message is too short or too long
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit
0
0Ah: DP parameter error
1
Module-No. or plug-in location
1.. 32: Module-No. or plug-in location
0: Module-No. or plug-in location not available
2
Length user parameter data
3
Mode
0: Standard mode
1: 400-mode
4
Number of digital modules (slave)
5
Number of analog modules (slave)
6
Number of analog modules (master)
14h
DP configuration error - length
Length: 6
Depending on the mode, the length of the configuration message is
compared to the length of the default-configuration (modules detected on
Byte
2-34
Bit 7 ... Bit
0
14h: DP configuration error - length
1
Module-No. or plug-in location
1 ... 32: Module-No. or plug-in location
0: Module-No. or plug-in location not available
2
Configuration data quantity (master)
4
Configuration data quantity (slave)
3
Mod
0: Standard mode
1: 400-mode
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
2
15h
DP configurations error - entry
Length: 6
Depending on the mode and when the length of the configuration message
matches the length of the default-configuration the different entries in the
configuration message are compared to the default configuration.
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit
0
15h: DP configuration error - entry
1
Module-No. or plug-in location
1 ... 32: Module-No. or plug-in location
0: Module-No. or plug-in location not available
2
Configuration byte master (module identifier)
4
Configuration byte slave (module identifier
3
Mod
0: Standard mode
1: 400-mode
1Eh
Under voltage/power failure
Length: 2
A time stamp is saved immediately to the EEPROM when a power failure or
a voltage drop is detected. In the case that the available power should be
adequate the diagnostic is transferred to the master.
The time stamp in the EEPROM is used to generate an under voltage/
power-off diagnostic message at the time of the next restart and saved to
the diagnostic-RAM.
Byte
0
Bit 7 ... Bit
1Eh: Under voltage/power failur
28h
V-bus configuration error
Length: 3
The configuration for the specified plug-in location failed.
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit
0
28h: V-bus configuration erro
1
Module-No. or plug-in location
1 ... 32: Module-No. or plug-in location
0: Module-No. or plug-in location not available
Chapter 2 Profibus
2-35
Profibus-DP
29h
V-bus initialization error
Length: 2
General back panel bus error
Byte
0
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
29h: V-bus initialization erro
2Ah
V-bus bus error
Length: 2
Hardware error or module failure
Byte
0
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
2Ah: V-bus erro
2Bh
V-bus delayed acknowledgment
Length: 2
Reading or writing from/to digital modules failed
Byte
0
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
2Bh: V-bus delayed acknowledgmen
32h
ADAM-8000 diagnostic alarm
Length: 16
Operation
Index
Subindex
Default (h)
Read
6423
0
00
Write
6423
0
Value (h)
00
FF
33h
ADAM-8000 process alarm
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit
0
33h: ADAM-8000 process alarm
1
Module-No. or plug-in location
1 ... 32: Module-No. or plug-in location
0: Module-No. or plug-in location not available
2 ... 14
2-36
Length: 16
Process alarm dat
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
2
3Ch
A new DP-address was defined
Length: 2
When the slave has received the service with “Set Slave Address” it sends
the respective diagnostic message and re-boots. The slave will then become
available on the bus under the new address.
Byte
0
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
3Ch: A new DP-address was define
3Dh
Slave status is ready
Length: none (only internal)
The ready status of the slave is only used internally and not transmitted via
the Profibus.
Byte
0
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
3Dh: Slave status is read
3Eh
Slave status is Data_Exchange
Length: bone (only internal)
The Data_Exchange status of the slave is only used internally and not
transmitted via the Profibus.
Byte
0
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
3Eh: Slave status is Data_Exchang
Chapter 2 Profibus
2-37
Profibus-DP
Installation guidelines
Profibus in general
• The Advantech Profibus DP-network must have a linear structure.
• Profibus DP consists of a minimum of one segment with at least one
master and one slave.
• A master must always be used in conjunction with a CPU.
• Profibus supports a max. of 125 devices.
• A max. of 32 devices are permitted per segment.
• The maximum length of a segment depends on the rate of transfer: 9,6 ...
187,5 kBaud
à
1000 m
500 kBaud
à
400 m
1,5 MBaud
à
200 m
3 ... 12 MBaud à
100 m
• The network may have a maximum of 10 segments. Segments are
connected by means of repeaters. Every repeater represents a device on
the network.
• All devices communicate at the same baudrate, slaves adapt automatically to the baudrate.
Fiber optic system
• Only one fiber optic master may be used on a single line.
• Multiple masters may be employed with a single CPU as long as these
are located on the back panel bus (please take care not to exceed the
max. current consumption).
• The maximum length of a FO link between two slaves may not exceed
50m at 12Mbaud.
• The bus does not require termination.
Note!
You should place covers on the unused sockets on any fiber optic device
connected to the bus to prevent being blinded by the light or to stop
interference from external light sources. You can use the supplied rubber
stoppers for this purpose. Insert the rubber stoppers into the unused
openings on the FO interface.
electrical system
• The bus must be terminated at both ends.
• Masters and slaves may be installed in any combination.
2-38
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
2
combined system
• Any FO master must only be installed on an electrical system by means
of an Optical Link Plug, i.e. slaves must not be located between a master
and the OLP.
• Only one converter (OLP) is permitted between any two masters.
Installation and integration with Profibus
• Assemble your Profibus system using the required modules.
• Adjust the address of the bus coupler to an address that is not yet in
use on your system.
• Transfer the supplied GSD file into your system and configure the
system as required.
• Transfer the configuration into your master.
• Connect the Profibus cable to the coupler and turn the power supply on.
Note!
The Profibus line must be terminated with its characteristic impedance.
Please ensure that the line is terminated by means of a termination resistor
located at the last station on the bus is.
The FO Profibus system does not require termination!
Profibus using RS485
Profibus employs a screened twisted pair cable based on RS485 interface
specifications as the data communication medium.
The following figure shows a Profibus connection using RS485 together
with the required termination resistors:
Chapter 2 Profibus
2-39
Profibus-DP
Bus connector
In systems with more than two stations all partners are wired in parallel. For
that purpose the bus cable must be connected in a continuous uninterrupted loop.
Profibus connector is a bus connector with switchable terminating resistor
and integrated bus diagnosis.
To connect this connector please use the standard Profibus cable type A
according to EN50170.
Attention!
The bus cable has always to be terminated with the ripple resistor to avoid
reflections and therefore communication problems!
Termination
The bus connector is provided with a switch that may be used to activate a
terminating resistor.
2-40
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
2
Attention!
The terminating resistor is only effective, if the connector is installed at a
slave and the slave is connected to a power supply.
Note!
A complete description of installation and deployment of the terminating
resistors is delivered with the connector.
Profibus wit FO link
The fiber optic cable (FO) transfers signals by means of electromagnetic
waves at optical frequencies. Total reflection will occur at the point where
the coating of the fiber optic cable meets the core since the refractive index
of this material is lower than that of the core. This total reflection prevents
the ray of light escaping from the fiber optic conductor and it will therefore
travel to the end of the fiber optic cable.
The FO cable is provided with a protective coating.
The following diagram figure shows the construction of a fiber optic cable:
The fiber optic system employs pulses of monochromatic light at a wavelength of 650nm. If the fiber optic cable is installed in accordance with the
manufacturers guidelines it is not susceptible to external electrical interference. Fiber optic systems have a linear structure. Each device requires two
lines, a transmit and a receive line (dual core). It is not necessary to provide
a terminator at the last device.
The Profibus FO network supports a maximum of 126 devices (including the
master). The maximum distance between two devices is limited to 50 m.
Advantages of FO over copper cables
•
•
•
•
•
•
wide bandwidth
low attenuation
no crosstalk between cores
immunity to external electrical interference
no potential difference
lightning protection
Chapter 2 Profibus
2-41
Profibus-DP
•
•
•
•
may be installed in explosive environments
low weight and more flexible
corrosion resistant
safety from eavesdropping attempts
Fiber optic cabling under Profibus
The Advantech fiber optic Profibus coupler employs dual core plastic fiber
optic cable as the communication medium. You must keep the following
points in mind when you connect your Profibus FO-coupler: predecessor
and successor must always be connected by means of a dual core FO-cable.
The Advantech bus-coupler carries 4 FO-connectors. The communication
direction is defined by the color of the connector (darker: receive line,
lighter: send line).
When the bus has been turned on you can recognize the receive line by the
light while the darker line is the send line. Advantech recommends that you
use the FO-connector supplied by Hewlett Packard (HP). Two different
versions of these connectors are available:
FO-connector with crimp-type assembly
FO-connector without crimp-type assembly
FO-connector with crimp-type assembly
HP order no.: HFBR-4506 (gray) HFBR-4506B (black)
Advantages: polarity protection You can only install the connector so that
the side of the connector shown here faces to the right. Disadvantages:
special tool required
You require a special crimping tool from Hewlett Packard (HP order no.:
HFBR-4597) for the installation of the press ring required for strain relief.
Connector installation
You install the connector by first pushing the pressring onto the dual core
FO cable. Separate the two cores for a distance of app. 5 cm. Use a stripper
to remove the protection cover so that app. 7 mm of the fiber is visible.
Insert the two cores into the plug so that the ends of the fiber optic cable
protrude at the front. Keep an eye on the polarity of the cores (s.a.).
Push the pressring onto the plug and crimp the ring by means of the crimp
tool. The description of how to trim and polish of the ends of the FO cores
is identical to the 2nd connector type shown below.
2-42
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
2
FO-connector without crimp-type assembly
HP order no.: HFBR-4531
Advantages: no special tool required. This shell of this type of plug is
provided with an integrated strain relief. The fiber optic cable is clamped
securely when you clip the two sections of the shell together.
This system can be used to prepare simplex and duplex plugs. You can
assemble a simplex plug by clipping the two sections of a shell together and
a duplex plug by clipping two plugs together.
Disadvantages: no protection against polarity reversal.
These plugs can be inserted in two positions. Please check the polarity
when you have turned on the power. The light emitting fiber is the fiber for
reception.
Assembling a plug:
2 complete plugs are required to assemble a duplex plug. Separate the two
cores for a distance of app. 5cm. Separate the two cores for a distance of
app. 5 cm. Use a stripper to remove the protection cover so that app. 7 mm
of the fiber is visible.
Insert the two cores into the plug so that the ends of the fiber optic cable
protrude at the front. Keep an eye on the polarity of the cores (s.a.).
Chapter 2 Profibus
2-43
Profibus-DP
Connecton for predecess or
reception
Connecton for predecess or
reception
tr ansmis sion
tr ansmis sion
Connection for su ccesso r
tr ansmis sion
reception
Connection for su ccesso r
tr ansmis sion
reception
Cutting and polishing the ends of the FO cable
Cut protruding fiber using a knife so that app. 1.5 mm are still visible. Polish
the ends to a flat surface using the HP polishing set (HP order no.:HFBR4593).
Insert the plug into the polishing tool and polish the fiber to achieve a plane
surface as shown in the figure. The instructions that are included with the
set contain a detailed description of the required procedure.
2-44
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
2
Example of a Profibus network
One CPU and multiple master interfaces
The CPU must have a short cycle time to ensure that the data from slave no.
5 (on the right) are always up to date. This type of structure is only suitable
when the data from slaves on the slow trunk (on the left) is not critical.
These locations should therefore not be connected to modules that are able
to issue alarms.
Chapter 2 Profibus
2-45
Profibus-DP
Multi master system
Multiple master interfaces on a single bus in conjunction with a number of
slaves:
2-46
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
2
Optical Profibus
Combination of optical and electrical Profibus
In a combined fiber optical Profibus systems only a single converter (OLP)
may be installed between any two masters!
Chapter 2 Profibus
2-47
Profibus-DP
2-48
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
2
Commissioning
Overview
•
•
•
•
•
Assemble your Profibus system.
Configure your master system.
Transfer the configuration into your master.
Connect the Profibus cable to the coupler.
Turn the power supply on.
Installation
Assemble your Profibus system using the required modules.
Every Profibus slave coupler has an internal power supply. This power
supply requires an external 24 VDC power supply. In addition to the circuitry
of the bus coupler the supply voltage is also used to power any modules
connected to the back panel bus.
Profibus and back panel bus are galvanically isolated.
Addressing
Adjust the address of every Profibus slave module as required.
Configuration in the master system
Configure your Profibus master in your master system. You can use the
WinNCS of Advantech for this purpose.
Transferring your project
A number of different transfer methods are employed due to the fact that a
number of different hardware versions of the Advantech Profibus master
modules exist. These transfer methods are described in the master configuration guide for the respective hardware version.
Connecting a system by means of Profibus
In a system with more than two stations all stations are wired in parallel. For
this reason the bus cable must be connected as an uninterrupted loop.
You must always keep an eye on the correct polarity!
Note!
To prevent reflections and associated communication problems the bus
cable must always be terminated with its characteristic impedance!
Chapter 2 Profibus
2-49
Profibus-DP
Start-up behavior
IM 208 - Master
When the IM 208 interface is connected to a supply (Power On) the
configuration data is read from the memory card, verified and stored into the
internal RAM of the IM 208.
At power on the master will automatically change to RUN mode if the
operating mode selector is set to RUN and if the parameters are acceptable.
In RUN mode the LED’s RN and DE are on. When all the configured slaves
have become available in the data exchange the ER-LED is extinguished.
In STOP mode the outputs of the allocated slaves will be set to 0 if the
parameters are valid. Although no communications will take place, the
master will remain active on the bus using current bus parameters and
occupying the allocated bus address. To release the address the Profibus
plug must be removed from the IM 208 interface.
IM 253 - slave
After power on the Profibus coupler executes a self test. This test checks
the couplers internal functions and the communications via the back panel
bus.
When the bus coupler has been initialized properly its status is set to
“READY”.
When the status is READY the slave receives the parameters that are
located in the master and that were previously configured. When the
parameters have been validated the status of the slave changes to “Data
Exchange” DE.
The DE-LED is turned on when the module is communicating. Should
communication errors occur on the back panel bus the Profibus coupler will
be placed in STOP mode and it will be re-started after app. 2 seconds. The
RD-LED blinks when the test has returned a positive result.
2-50
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
2
Using the diagnostic LED’s
The following example shows the reaction of the LED’s for different types
of network interruption.
Interruption at position A
The Profibus has an open circuit.
Interruption at position B
Communications via the back panel bus has been interrupted.
LED slave 1
Position of
interruptio
LED slave 2
Position of
interruptio
LED
A
B
LED
A
B
RD
blinks
off
RD
blinks
on
ER
off
on
ER
off
off
DE
off
off
DE
off
on
Chapter 2 Profibus
2-51
Profibus-DP
Example - ADAM-8000 with Profibus under WinNCS
Problem
The following example describes the configuration of a ADAM-8000 by
means of WinNCS. The system must consist of centralized and decentralized peripherals. The decentralized peripherals should be linked by means of
Profibus.
The contents of a counter that is generated in the centralized periphery
must be transferred to the decentralized peripherals via the Profibus link for
output via an output module.
This example employs output byte 16 for the transfer of the counter value.
Note!
You can also find this example in the HB91 “Advantech Component
Library -ACL” manual that also contains a description of WinNCS.
This problem can be divided into the following section:
• Configuration of the centralized periphery (Profibus-Master IM 208 DP)
• Configuration of the decentralized periphery (Profibus-Slave IM 253 DP
with I/O modules)
• Exporting the configuration as 2bf-file
• Installing the Profibus mapping in the CPU 21x by means of the 2bf-file.
• Transferring the 2bf-file into the Profibus master
• Transferring the s5d-file as DB1 into the CPU
• Creating the counter program and transferring it to the CPU 24x
• Creating labels
System requirements
Minimum requirements for the ADAM-8000 modules
• CPU 24x
• IM 208 DP Profibus master
• IM 253 DP Profibus slave
• at least one output module
Software tools required
• WinNCS
• SIP.EXE (contained in WinNCS)
• SPS programming package, e.g. the Advantech MC5
2-52
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
2
System structure
Configuration of the decentralized periphery (Profibus)
1. Start WinNCS and create a new project file for the ”Profibus” function by clicking on File >
create/open.
2.
If you have not yet done so, use to
insert a Profibus function group into the
network window and click [Accept] in the parameter box.
3.
Use
to insert a Profibus host/master into the network window and specify the
Profibus address of your master in the parameter window.
4.
Insert a Profibus slave into the network window by means of
. Enter the
Profibus address, the family “I/O” and the station type “DP200V” into the parameter window
and click [Accept]
5.
Use
to define the configuration of every peripheral module starting with the
CP240 module “240-1BA00”. You can select automatic addressing for the periphery by
clicking [Auto]. For intelligent modules like the CP240 the configurable parameters will be
displayed.
Define the configuration for the output module “ADAM 8222-1BF00” that must output the
counter using the o-addr. 16.
Configure the remaining two modules “ADAM 8222-1BF00” and “ADAM 8222-1HF00” by
means of the auto-addressing function.
6. Activate the Profibus function group in the network window. Click on the “Busparameter” tab
in the parameter window. Select the required baud-rate and click [calculate]. The bus
parameters will be calculated - [Accept] these.
The bus parameters must be re-calculated with every change of the module configuration!
7. Activate the master-level in the network window and export your project into a 2bf-file.
8. Transfer your 2bf-file into the Profibus master by means of the SIP-tool that is supplied.
Chapter 2 Profibus
2-53
Profibus-DP
Configuration of the centralized periphery (CPU 24x)
9. Select the “ADAM-8000” functionality in Tools > ADAM-8000.
10.
Insert a ADAM-8000 function group in the network window by means of
[Accept] in the parameter window.
and click
11.
Insert a CPU 24x in the network window by means of
.
12.
Use
to define the configuration of every peripheral module starting with the
Profibus master “ADAM 8208-1DP00”. As DP-master you enter the 2bf-file that you have
exported above.
Your Profibus together with the decentralized periphery is included as a representation of
this module. Under [Map] this is displayed as the blue area.
At this point you must configure the remaining ADAM-8000 modules as described in 5.,
“ADAM 8221-1BF.., “ADAM 8222-1HF00” and “ADAM 8240-1BA00”.
13.
Activate the CPU-level in the network window and click on
export. Export your
ADAM-8000 configuration into the default file [email protected]@@st.s5d. This s5d-file contains the
DB1 that you can transfer to your CPU by means of the available programs like, for
instance MC5 of Advantech.
Creating and printing labels
14. Activate the module level in the network window and open the “Label” tab (”Etikett”). Here
you can define up to 9 lines of text. For most modules the respective operands are provided
as defaults in accordance with the configuration - however, these may be overwritten. Once
you have completed the edits click on [Accept].
15. Activate the option ”Labels” (”Etiketten”) in File > Print options.
16. When you have opened the network window of one of the module levels the page view will
display the labels of all the modules of the selected level.
17. Insert the tractor-feed label forms that are available from Advantech into your printer (order
no.: Advantech 292-1XY10).
18.
Use the print button
in the page view to print the labels displayed above
PLC program with counter
FB1:
L AB16
I1
T AB16
2-54
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
OB1:
SPA FB1
Chapter
2
Technical data
Profibus-DP master
IM 208 DP
Electrical data
Advantech ADAM 8208-1DP01
Power supply
via back panel bus
Current consumption
380mA max.
Isolation
500 VAC
Status indicators
via LED’s on the front
Connections/interfaces
9-pin D-type socket Profibus connecto
Profibus interface
Connection
9-pin D-type socket
Network topology
Linear bus, active bus terminator at both ends, radial lines are
permitted.
Medium
Screened twisted pair cable, under certain conditions
unscreened lines are permitted.
Data transfer rate
9,6 kBaud to 12 MBaud
Total length
100 m without repeaters for 12 MBaud, 1000 m with repeaters
Max. no. of stations
32 stations in any segment without repeaters. Extendible to 126
stations when using repeaters
Combination with peripheral modules
max. no of slaves
125
max. no. of input bytes
256
max. no. of output bytes
25
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm
25, 4 x 76 x 76
Weight
110
Chapter 2 Profibus
2-55
Profibus-DP
IM 208 DPO
Electrical data
Advantech ADAM 8208-2DP10
Power supply
via rear panel bus
Current consumption
max. 380 mA
Isolation
500 VAC
Status indicator
via LED’s located on the front
Connections/interfaces
4-pole socket for fibre optic cable Profibus interfac
Profibus interface
Connection
4-port socket for fibre optic cable
Network topology
Linear structure with dual FO cable, no bus terminator required
Medium
dual-core fibre optic cable
Data transfer rate
12 MBaud
Total length
max. 50 m between stations
Max. no. of stations
126 stations incl. Master
Combination with peripheral modules
max. no of slaves
125
max. no. of input bytes
256
max. no. of output bytes
25
Dimensions and weight
2-56
Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm
50, 8 x 76 x 76
Weight
110
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
2
Profibus-DP-Slave
IM 253 DP
Electrical data
Advantech ADAM 8253-1DP00
Power supply
24 VDC, from ext. power supply connected to front
Current consumption
1A max.
Isolation
≥ 500 VAC
Status indicator
via LED’s on the front
Connections/interfaces
9-pin D-type socket Profibus connecto
Profibus interface
Connection
9-pin D-type socket
Network topology
Linear bus, active bus terminator at both ends, radial lines are
permitted.
Medium
Screened twisted pair cable, under certain conditions
unscreened lines are permitted.
Data transfer rate
9, 6 kBaud to 12 MB aud (automatic adjustment)
Total length
100 m without repeaters for 12 MBaud; 1000 m with repeaters
Max. no. of stations
32 stations in any segment without repeaters. Extendible to 126
stations when using repeaters
Diagnostic functions
Standard diagnostics
The last 100 results are stored in Flash-ROM together with a
time stamp. This data is accessible by means of a special tool
and a cable.
Extended diagnostics
-
Combination with peripheral modules
max. no of modules
32
max. no. of digitals
32
max. no of analogs
16
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm
25, 4 x 76 x 76
Weight
80g
Chapter 2 Profibus
2-57
Profibus-DP
IM 253 DPO
Electrical data
Advantech ADAM 8253-1DP10
Power supply
24 VDC, from ext. power supply connected to front
Current consumption
1 A max.
Isolation
≥ 500 VAC
Status indicator
via LED’s on the front
Connections/interfaces
9-pin D-type socket Profibus connecto
Profibus interface
Connection
4-port socket for fibre optic cable
Network topology
Linear structure with dual FO cable, no bus terminator required
Medium
dual-core fibre optic cable
Data transfer rate
12 MBaud
Total length
max. 50 m between stations
Max. no. of stations
126 stations incl. Master
Diagnostic functions
Standard diagnostics
The last 100 results are stored in Flash-ROM together with a
time stamp. This data is accessible by means of a special tool
and a cable.
Extended diagnostics
-
Combination with peripheral modules
max. no of modules
32
max. no. of digitals
32
max. no of analogs
16
Dimensions and weight
2-58
Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm
25, 4 x 76 x 76
Weight
80g
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
2
Profibus-DP-slave combination module
IM 253 DP DO 24xDC24V
Electrical data
Advantech ADAM 8253-2DP20
Power supply
24 VDC, from ext. power supply connected to front
Current consumption
5 A max.
Profibus interface
Connection
9-pin D-type socket
Network topology
Linear bus, active bus terminator at both ends.
Medium
Screened twisted pair cable, under certain conditions
unscreened lines are permitted.
Data transfer rate
9, 6 kBaud to 12 MBaud (automatic adjustment)
Total length
100 m without repeaters for 12 MB aud; 1000 m with repeaters
Max. no of stations
32 stations in any segment without repeaters. Extendible to 126
stations when using repeaters.
Status indicator
via LED’s on the front
Combination with peripheral modules
max. no of modules
32
max. digital I/O’s
32
max. analog I/O’s
16
Output unit
Number of outputs
24
Rated load voltage
24 VDC (18...35 V) supplied internally via Profibus coupler
Output current per channel
1 A (total current must not exceed 4 A)
Status indicator
Power (PW) fuse OK, Error (ER) short circuit, overload
Programming data
Output data
4 Byte (3 bytes are used)
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm
50, 8 x 76 x 76
Weight
150g
Chapter 2 Profibus
2-59
Profibus-DP
2-60
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
CAN-Bus CANopen
3
CAN-Bus CANopen
Overview
This chapter contains the description of the Advantech CANopen slave.
The introduction to the system is followed by the description of the
module. Another section of this chapter concerns CAN-Bus applications
for the module. This section describes the message structure and the
configuration of the module by means of examples. An extensive set of
examples and an overview of the different module identifiers as well as the
technical data conclude the chapter.
Below follows a description of:
• CAN-Bus principles
• The Advantech CANopen slave
• The Baudrate and Module-ID settings
• Application of the CANopen slave on the CAN-Bus with a message
description
• Configuration examples
• Overview of the module identifiers
• Technical data
Ordering details
3-2
Order number
Description
ADAM 8253-1CA00
CAN-Bus CANopen Slav
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
3
Chapter
System overview
You can use the Advantech CAN-Bus coupler to link up to 32 modules (of
40 bytes each) of your ADAM-8000 periphery with CANopen.
A single CAN-Bus coupler is currently available from Advantech.
ADAM 8253-1CA00
Ordering details
Order number
Description
ADAM 8253-1CA00
CAN-Bus CANopen Slav
Chapter 3 CAN-Bus CANopen
3-3
CAN-Bus CANopen
Principles
General
CAN-B (control area network) is an international standard for open fieldbus
systems intended for building, manufacturing and process automation
applications that was originally designed for automotive applications. Due
to its extensive error detection facilities the CAN bus system is regarded as
the most secure bus system. It has a residual error probability of less than
4,7 x 10-11. Bad messages are flagged and retransmitted automatically.
In contrast to Profibus and Interbus-S, the CAL-level-7-protocol
(CAL=CAN application layer) defines various level-7 user profiles for the
CAN bus. CANopen is a standard user profile defined by the CiA CAN in
Automation association.
CANopen
CANopen is a user profile for industrial real-time systems, which is currently supported by a large number of manufacturers. CANopen was published
under the heading of DS-301 by the CAN in Automation association (C.i.A).
The communication specifications DS-301 define standards for CAN
devices. These specifications mean that the equipment supplied by
different manufacturers is interchangeable. The compatibility of the
equipment is further enhanced by the equipment specification DS-401 that
defines standards for the technical data and process data of the equipment.
DS-401 contains the standards for digital and analog input/output modules.
CANopen comprises a communication profile that defines the objects that
must be used for the transfer of certain data as well as the device profiles
that specify the type of data that must be transferred by means of other
objects.
The CANopen communication profile is based upon an object directory that
is similar to the profile used by Profibus. The communication profile DS-301
defines two standard objects as well as a number of special objects:
• Process data objects (PDO)
PDO’s are used for real-time data transfers
• Service data objects (SDO)
SDO’s provide access to the object directory for read and write operations
3-4
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
3
Communication medium
CAN is based on a linear bus topology. You can use router nodes to
construct a network. The number of devices per network is only limited by
the performance of the bus driver modules.
The maximum distance covered by the network is determined by the
runtimes of the signals. This means that a data rate of 1 Mbaud limits the
network to 40m and 80 kBaud limits the network to 1000m.
The CAN-Bus communication medium employs a screened three-core cable
(optionally a five-core). The CAN-Bus operates by means of differential
voltages. For this reason it is less sensitive to external interference than a
pure voltage or current based interface. The network must be configured as
a serial bus, which is terminated by a 120 termination resistor.
Your VIPA CAN bus coupler contains a 9-pin socket. You must use this
socket to connect the CAN bus coupler as a slave directly to your CAN bus
network.
All devices on the network use the same Baud rate.
Due to the bus structure of the network it is possible to connect or disconnect any station without interruption to the system. It is therefore also
possible to commission a system in various stages. Extensions to the
system do not affect the operational stations. Defective stations or new
stations are recognized automatically.
Bus access method
Bus access methods are commonly divided into controlled (deterministic)
and uncontrolled (random) bus access systems.
CAN employs a Carrier-Sense Multiple Access (CSMA) method, i.e. all
stations have the same right to access the bus as long as the bus is not in
use (random bus access).
Data communications is message related and not station related. Every
message contains a unique identifier, which also defines the priority of the
message. At any instance only one station can occupy the bus for a
message.
CAN bus access control is performed by means of a collision-free, bit-based
arbitration algorithm. Collision-free means that the final winner of the
arbitration process does not have to repeat his message. The station with
the highest priority is selected automatically when more than one station
accesses the bus simultaneously. Any station that is has information to
send will delay the transmission if it detects that the bus is occupied.
Chapter 3 CAN-Bus CANopen
3-5
CAN-Bus CANopen
Bus coupler CANopen
Construction
ADAM 8253-1CA00
Components
LED’s
The module is equipped with three LED’s for diagnostic purposes. The
following table shows how the diagnostic LED’s are used along with the
respective colors.
Nam
Color Description
PW
yellow Indicates that the supply voltage is available.
ER
3-6
red
On when an error was detected in the back panel bus
communications.
RD
Blinks at 1 Hz when the self-test was positive and the initialization
green was OK.
Is turned on when data is being communicated via the VBUS.
BA
Off the self-test was positive and the initialization was OK.
Blinks at 1 Hz when the status is “Pre-operational”.
yellow
Is turned on when the status is “Operational”.
Blinks at 10 Hz when the status is “Prepared”.
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
3
Status indicator as a combination of LED’s
Various combinations of the LED’s indicate the different operating statuses:
PW on
Error during RAM or EEPROM initialization
ER on
RD on
BA on
PW on
Baudrate setting activated
ER blinks 1 Hz
RD blinks 1 Hz
BA blinks 1 Hz
PW on
Error in the CAN Baudrate setting
ER blinks 10 Hz
RD blinks 10 Hz
BA blinks 10 Hz
PW on
Module ID-setting activated
ER off
RD blinks 1 Hz
BA off
9-pin D-type socket
The Advantech CAN-Bus coupler is connected to the CAN-Bus system by
means of a 9-pin socket.
The following diagram shows the pin assignment for the interface
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Assignment
n.c.
CAN l ow
CAN ground
n.c.
n.c.
optional ground
CAN h igh
n.c.
optional pos. supply
Chapter 3 CAN-Bus CANopen
3-7
CAN-Bus CANopen
Address selector for Baudrate and module-ID
The address selector is used to specify the module-ID as well as the CAN
Baud rate.
For details please refer to the section under the heading “Baudrate and
Module-ID settings “ in this chapter.
Power supply
The CAN-bus coupler is equipped with an internal power supply. This
power supply requires an external supply of 24V DC. In addition to the
internal circuitry of the bus coupler the supply voltage is also used to
power any devices connected to the back panel bus. Please note that the
maximum current available for the back panel bus from the internal power
supply is limited to 3A.
CAN-Bus and back panel bus are isolated from each other.
CAN-Bus wiring
The CAN-Bus communication medium bus is a screened three-core cable.
aster-Interface
S lave-Interface
Sh ield
7
CAN high
120
CAN low
CAN Ground
CAN Ground
2
3
CAN high
CAN low
CAN Ground
Do not connect
Line termination
All stations on systems having more than two stations are wired in parallel.
This means that the bus cable must be looped from station to station
without interruptions.
Note!
The end of the bus cable must be terminated with a 120 termination
resistor to prevent reflections and the associated communication errors!
3-8
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
3
Chapter
Block diagram
The following block diagram shows the hardware structure of the bus
coupler and the internal communications:
galvanic isolation
(by m eans of opt ocoupl ers and
DC/DC c onverter)
CAN T ransceiver
CANopen- Bus
Data
Exchange
EPROM
Reset
Error
Microcontrollerbus
CAN-Bus
Controller
Clock
BA
Microcont roller
Clock
Voltage
monitoring
Reset
Address
selector
ADAM-8000
interface ci rcuitry
Po wer
24V
(terminals)
Po wer
sup ply
24V / 5V
+5V
ADAM-8000
back p anel bus
Chapter 3 CAN-Bus CANopen
3-9
CAN-Bus CANopen
Baudrate and module-ID settings
You have the option to specify the baudrate and the module-ID by setting
the address selector to 00 within a period of 10s after you have turned the
power on.
The selected settings are saved permanently in an EEPROM and can be
changed at any time by means of the procedure shown above.
Specifying the Baudrate by means of the address selector
• Set the address selector to 00.
• Turn on the power to the CAN-Bus coupler
The LED’s ER, RD, and BA will blink at a frequency of 1Hz. For a period of
5s you can now enter the CAN-Baudrate means of the address selector :
Address selector
CAN-Baudrate
max. guar. bus distance
“00”
1 Mbaud
25 m
“01”
500 kBaud
100 m
“02”
“03”
250 kBaud
125 kBaud
250 m
500 m
“04”
“05”
100 kBaud
50 kBaud
600 m
1000 m
“06”
“07”
20 kBaud
10 kBaud
2500 m
5000 m
“08”
800 kBaud
50 m
After 5 seconds the selected CAN-Baudrate is saved in the EEPROM.
Module-ID selection
LED’s ER and BA are turned off and the red RD-LED continues to blink.
At this point you have 5s to enter the required module-ID.
• Define the module-ID in a range between 01...99 by means of the
address selection switch. Every module-ID may only exist once on the
bus. The module-ID must be defined before the bus coupler is turned
on.
The entered module-ID’s are accepted when a period of 5s has expired after
which the bus coupler returns to the normal operating mode (status: “PreOperational”).
3-10
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
3
Baudrate selection by an SDO-write operation
You can also modify the CAN-Baudrate by means of an SDO-Write opera
tion to the object “2001h”. The entered value is used as the CAN-Baudrate
when the bus coupler has been RESET. This method is a most convenient
when you must change the CAN-Baudrate of all the bus couplers of a
system from a central CAN-terminal. The bus couplers use the programmed
Baudrate when the system has been RESET.
Message structure
All CANopen messages have the following structure:
Identifier
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
1
Bit 3 ... Bit 0: most significant 4 bits of the module-ID
Bit 7 ... Bit 4: CANopen function code
2
Bit 3 ... Bit 0: data length code (DLC)
Bit 4: RTR-Bit: 0: no data (request code)
1: data available
Bit 7 ... Bit 5: Least significant 3 bits of the module-ID
Data
Byte
3 ... 10
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
Data
An additional division of the 2-byte identifier into function portion and a
module-ID gives the difference between this and a level 2 message. The
function determines the type of message (object) and the module-ID
addresses the receiver.
CANopen devices exchange data in the form of objects. The CANopen
communication profile defines two different object types as well as a
number of special objects.
The VIPA CAN-Bus coupler supports the following objects:
• 5 transmit PDO’s
• 5 receive PDO’s
• 2 standard SDO’s
• 1 emergency object
Chapter 3 CAN-Bus CANopen
3-11
CAN-Bus CANopen
• 1 network management object NMT
• node guarding
Every object is associated with a function code. You can obtain the required
function code from the following table.
CANopen function codes
The following table lists the defined CANopen objects and function codes
that are supported by the Advantech CAN-Bus coupler:
Object
Function
code
(4 bits)
NMT
0000
Broadcast
CiA DS-301
Network managem
EMERGENCY
0001
Master
CiA DS-301
Error message
PDO1S2M
0011
Master, Slave (RTR)
CiA DS-301
Digital input data
PDO1M2S
0100
Slave
CiA DS-301
Digital output data
PDO2S2M
0101
Master, Slave (RTR)
CiA DS-301
Analog input data
PDO2M2S
0110
Slave
CiA DS-301
Analog output data 1
PDO3S2M
0111
Master, Slave (RTR)
Application spec. D o. a input data
PDO3M2S
1000
Slave
Application spec. D o. a input data
PDO4S2M
1001
Master, Slave (RTR)
Application spec. D o. a input data
PDO4M2S
1010
Slave
Application spec. D o. a input data
PDO5S2M
1101
Master, Slave (RTR)
Application spec. D o. a input data
PDO5M2S
1111
Slave
Application spec. D o. a input data 4
SDO1S2M
1011
Master
CiA DS-301
SDO1M2S
1100
Slave
CiA DS-301
Configuration data
Node Guarding
1110
Master, Slave (RTR)
CiA DS-301
Module monitorin
Receiver
Definition
Functio
Configuration data
A detailed description of the structure and the contents of these objects is
available in “CiA Communication Profile DS-301 Version 3.0” and “CiA
Device Profile for I/O-Modules DPS 401 Version 1.4".
CANopen object PDO’s
5 process data objects (PDO) are available for the exchange of process data
communications. Every PDO consists of a maximum of 8 data bytes. The
transfer of PDO’s is not verified by means of acknowledgments since the
CAN protocol guarantees the transfer.
5 transmit PDO’s are available for input data and 5 receive PDO’s are for
output data. Every PDO has communication and mapping parameters that
the user may change and save via the bus.
3-12
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
3
Below follows a list of the COB-identifiers for the receive and the send
PDO-transfer that are pre-set after boot-up. The transmission type in the
object directory (indices 0x1400-0x1404 and 0x1800-0x1804, subindex 0x02) is
preset to asynchronous, event controlled (= 0xFF). The EVENT-timer (value
* 1ms) can be used to transfer the PDO’s on a cyclic basis.
Send PDO’s
Send PDO-COB-ID’s (inputs):
0x180 + module-ID: PDO1S2M digital (DS-301)
0x280 + module-ID: PDO2S2M analog (DS-301)
0x380 + module-ID: PDO3S2M digital or analog
(depending on the installed I/O modules)
0x480 + module-ID: PDO4S2M digital or analog
(depending on the installed I/O modules)
0x680 + module-ID: PDO5S2M digital or analog
(depending on the installed I/O modules)
Depending on the module configuration, PDO’s 3 to 5 are dynamically
distributed amongst the digital inputs and analog inputs if it is necessary to
transfer more than 8 bytes of digital or analog input data.
In this case the digital inputs are allocated first and the analog inputs are
assigned to the most significant PDO’s. It is not possible to assign a
combination of digital and analog inputs to a single PDO.
The number of allocated input data bytes per I/O-module is shown in the
table containing the module overview (refer to appendix).
Sample I/O module complement
Here follows an example of the I/O-module allocation to explain how the
PDO input bytes are assigned to the respective I/O-modules.
Plug-in location no.:
0
1
CAN
BM
DI8
Number of bytes DI
-
1
4
-
-
2
Number of bytes AI
-
-
-
-
-
-
Module type
2
3
4
5
DI32 AO4 D032 DIO16
6
7
8
9
AI4
FM250
DI8
DI
-
-
1
1
8
8
-
-
Chapter 3 CAN-Bus CANopen
3-13
CAN-Bus CANopen
In this example the input bytes of the I/O-modules were assigned to the
input PDO’s as follows:
PDO-Type
Length
PDO1S2M
8
PDO2S2M
8
PDO3S2M
1
PDO4S2M
8
PDO5S2M
notvali
Typ
Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6
DI8
locat.
“1”
DI32
locat.
“2”
DI32
locat.
“2”
DI32
locat.
“2”
DI32
locat.
“2”
AI4
Analog locat.
“6”
AI4
locat.
“6”
AI4
locat.
“6”
AI4
locat.
“6”
AI4
locat.
“6”
Dig.
Dig.
DIO16 DIO16
locat. locat.
“5”
“5”
AI4
locat.
“6”
AI4
locat.
“6”
Byte
DI8
locat.
“8
AI4
locat.
“6
DI8
locat.
“9
FM250 FM250 FM250 FM250 FM250 FM250 FM250 FM250
Analog locat. locat. locat. locat. locat. locat. locat. locat.
“7”
“7”
“7”
“7”
“7”
“7”
“7”
“7
Receive PDO’s
Receive PDO-COB-IDs (outputs):
0x200 + module-ID: PDO1M2S digital (DS-301)
0x300 + module-ID: PDO2M2S analog (DS-301)
0x400 + module-ID: PDO3M2S
0x500 + module-ID: PDO4M2S
0x780 + module-ID: PDO5M2S
Depending on the module configuration, PDO’s 3 to 5 are distributed
amongst the digital inputs and analog inputs if it is necessary to transfer
more than 8 bytes of digital or analog input data. In this case the digital
inputs are allocated first and the analog inputs are assigned to the most
significant PDO’s. It is not possible to assign a combination of digital and
analog inputs to a single PDO.
The number of allocated input data bytes per I/O-module is shown in the
table containing the module overview (refer to appendix).
The above example of the I/O-module allocation will be used in the following example to explain how the PDO output bytes are assigned to the
respective I/O-modules.
3-14
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
3
Sample I/O-module complement:
Plug-in location no.:
Module type
0
1
CAN
BM
DI8
2
3
4
5
DI32 AO4 D032 DIO16
6
7
8
9
AI4
FM250
DI8
DI
Number of bytes DI
-
-
-
-
4
2
-
-
-
-
Number of bytes AI
-
-
-
8
-
-
-
10
-
-
In this example the output bytes of the I/O-modules are assigned as follows
to the output PDO’s:
PDO-Type
Length
Typ
Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6
Dig.
DO32 DO32
locat. locat.
"4"
"4"
DO32
locat.
"4"
DO32
locat.
"4"
DO16
locat.
"4"
DO16
locat.
"4"
AO4
locat.
"3"
AO4
locat.
"3"
AO4
locat.
"3"
AO4
locat.
"3"
Byte
PDO1M2S
6
PDO2M2S
8
AO4
Analog locat.
"3"
PDO3M2S
8
FM250 FM250 FM250 FM250 FM250 FM250 FM250 FM250
Analog locat. locat. locat. locat. locat. locat. locat. locat.
"7"
"7"
"7"
"7"
"7"
"7"
"7"
"7"
PDO4M2S
2
FM250 FM250
Analog locat. locat.
"7"
"7"
PDO5M2S
notvali
AO4
locat.
"3"
AO4
locat.
"3"
Chapter 3 CAN-Bus CANopen
AO4
locat.
"3"
3-15
CAN-Bus CANopen
Service-data-objects SDO’s
The Service-Data-Object (SDO) is used for accesses to the object directory.
You can use the SDO to read from or to write to the object directory. The
CAL level-7 protocol contains the specifications for the MultiplexedDomain-Transfer-Protocol that is used by the SDO’s. You may use this
protocol to transfer any amount of data. During the transfer the messages
may be divided amongst a number of CAN-messages, each one with the
same identifier (segmentation).
4 or 8 bytes of the first CAN message for the SDO contain protocol information. Only a single CAN message is required to access object directory
entries with a length of four bytes or less. Where the length exceeds 4 bytes
the transfer is segmented. Every additional segment of an SDO contains up
to 7 bytes of user data. The last byte is provided with an ending label.
SDO’s are acknowledged, i.e. the reception of every message is acknowledged.
The COB identifiers provided for read and write access are:
• Receive-SDO: 600h + module-ID
• Transmit-SDO: 580h + module-ID
The object directory (cal_obj.c) contains the following entries (according to
DS 301):
3-16
Variable-address
Contents
0020h
PDO Communication Parameter Record
0021h
Digital-PDO Mapping Parameter Record
0040h
Pre-defined Error Field Record
0041h
Digital-16-Bit-PDOInOut Types Record
0042h
Analog-PDOInOut Types Record
0043h
Counter-PDOInOut Types Record
0044h
Analog-PDOInput Interrupt Types Record
0045h
Counter-PDOParameter Types Record
0046h
Counter-PDOInput Interrupt Types Record
1000h
Device type
1001h
Error Register
1003h
Error field
1004h
Number of PDO’s that are supported
1008h
Manufacturers name (“IMCA”)
1009h
Hardware version (4.00)
100Ah
Software version (2.03)
100Bh
Node address
100Ch
Guard Time
100Dh
Life Time Factor
100Eh
Node Guarding Identifie
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
1014h
Emergency COB-ID
1017h
Heartbeat Producer Time (Value * 1ms)
1018h
Device identification
Index 0: number of elements (permanently set to 4)
Index 1: vendor-ID (0xAFFEAFFEhex)
Index 2: hardware revision level (0x04hex)
Index 3: software revision level (0x23hex)
Index 4: date (0xDDMMYYYYhex)
1027h
Module list
Index 0: number of modules that were installed
Index 1..32: module identifier of the installed modules
1400h to 1404h
Communication parameter for receive-PDO’s
Index 0: number of entries (preset to 2)
Index 1: COB-ID
Index 2: transmission type (preset to 0xFFhex)
1600h to 1604h
Mapping parameter for receive PDO’s (variable mapping was not
implemented)
1800h to 1804h
Communication parameter for send-PDO’s
Index 0: number of entries (preset to 5)
Index 1: COB-ID
Index 2: transmission type (preset to 0xFFhex)
Index 3: inhibit time (as of software revision 2.03)
Index 5: event time (as of software revision 2.03)
1A00h to 1A04h
Mapping parameter for receive PDO’s (variable mapping was not
implemented
2001h
2100h
3
X Sub-index 0: CAN-Baudrate setting
Sub-index 0: erase EEPROM, after a RESET the bus coupler starts with the
default values.
3001h
X Analog parameter data for analog module 1
Sub-index 0: number of analog parameter data entries (inputs o. outputs) per
analog module
Sub-indices 1…4: 2 words of analog parameter data per sub-index Every
sub-index consists of 2 data words. Here you enter your parameter bytes.
Every analog input and analog output module has 16 bytes of parameter
data, i.e. it occupies 4 sub-indices, e.g.:
the first analog module is AO4 x 12-Bit and must be configured for +/- 10
Volt operation:
Sub-index 1: 0x40 0x00 0x01 0x01
Sub-index 2: 0x01 0x01 0x00 0x00
Sub-index 3: 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
Sub-index 4: 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
3002h
X Analog parameter data for 2. analog modul
Sub-index 0: number of analog parameter data items (inputs o. outputs)
per analog module
Sub-indices 1…4: 2 words of analog parameter data per sub-index
For an example refer to 3001h
3003h
X Analog parameter data for 3. analog modul
Sub-index 0: number of analog parameter data items (inputs o. outputs)
per analog module
Sub-indices 1…4: 2 words of analog parameter data per sub-index
For an example refer to 3001h
Chapter 3 CAN-Bus CANopen
3-17
CAN-Bus CANopen
3-18
3004h
X Analog parameter data for 4. analog module
Sub-index 0: number of analog parameter data items (inputs o. outputs)
per analog module
Sub-indices 1…4: 2 words of analog parameter data per sub-index
For an example refer to 3001h
3005h
X Analog parameter data for 5. analog module
Sub-index 0: number of analog parameter data items (inputs o. outputs)
per analog module
Sub-indices 1…4: 2 words of analog parameter data per sub-index
For an example refer to 3001h
3006h
X Analog parameter data for 6. analog module
Sub-index 0: number of analog parameter data items (inputs o. outputs)
per analog module
Sub-indices 1…4: 2 words of analog parameter data per sub-index
For an example refer to 3001h
3007h
X Analog parameter data for 7. analog module
Sub-index 0: number of analog parameter data items (inputs o. outputs)
per analog module
Sub-indices 1…4: 2 words of analog parameter data per sub-index
For an example refer to 3001h
3008h
X Analog parameter data for 8. analog module
Sub-index 0: number of analog parameter data items (inputs o. outputs)
per analog module
Sub-indices 1…4: 2 words of analog parameter data per sub-index
For an example refer to 3001h
3101h
X Parameter data for the 1. CP240 module
Sub-index 0: baudrate
Sub-index 1: protocol
Sub-index 2: delayed acknowledgment
Sub-index 3: character delay time
Sub-index 4: attempts
Sub-index 5: bit parameters
Sub-index 6: 3964(R) parameter
Sub-index 7: diagnostics enabled
3102h
X Parameter data for 2. CP240 module
Sub-index 0: baudrate
Sub-index 1: protocol
Sub-index 2: delayed acknowledgment
Sub-index 3: character delay time
Sub-index 4: attempts
Sub-index 5: bit parameters
Sub-index 6: 3964(R) parameter
Sub-index 7: diagnostics enabled
3201h
X Parameter data for 1. FM254–module
Sub-index 0: number of FM254-parameter data items per module
Sub-index 1: maximum rotational speed
Sub-index 2: reserved
Sub-index 3: reserved
Sub-index 4: P_amplification
Sub-index 5: pre-control factor
Sub-index 6: sensor line no.
Sub-index 7: reference rotational speed
Sub-index 8: attained pos. window
Sub-index 9: drag f.-window
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
3
3202h
X Parameter data for 2. FM254–module
Sub-index 0: number of FM254-parameter data items per module
Sub-index 1: maximum rotational speed
Sub-index 2: reserved
Sub-index 3: reserved
Sub-index 4: P_amplification
Sub-index 5: pre-control factor
Sub-index 6: sensor line no.
Sub-index 7: reference rotational speed
Sub-index 8: attained pos. window
Sub-index 9: drag f.-window
3401h
X Analog parameter (inputs a. outputs)
Alternative options to write/read analog parameters.
Sub-indices 0…32 (128 bytes):
Sub-index 0: number of sub-indices
Sub-index 1: parameter byte 0 ... 3
.
.
Sub-index 32: parameter byte 124 ... 127
Every sub-index consists of 2 data words. Enter your parameter bytes here.
Every analog input and analog output module has 16 bytes of parameter
data, i.e. they occupy 4 sub-indices, e.g.:
1. analog module sub-indices 1 to 4,
2. analog module sub-indices 5 to 8 etc. ...
3402h
X Counter parameters
Sub-indices 0…4 (8 bytes):
Every sub-index consists of 2 data words. Enter your parameter bytes here:
Sub-index 0: number of sub-indices
Sub-index 1: parameter byte 0 ... 1 .
.
.
Sub-index 4: parameter byte 6 ... 7
3412h
X Counter control byte
Sub-index 0: number of sub-indices
Sub-index 1: control byte 1
.
.
Sub-index 4: control byte 4
3421h
X Counter-input interrupt trigger array (similar to 6421h)
3422h
Counter-input interrupt source array (similar to 6422h)
3423h
X Counter-input interrupt enable (similar to 6423h)
3424h
X Counter-input interrupt upper limit array (similar to 6424h)
3425h
X Counter-input interrupt lower limit array (similar to 6425h)
3426h
X Counter-input interrupt delta limit array (similar to 6426h)
3427h
X Counter-input interrupt negative delta limit array (similar to 6427h)
3428h
X Counter-input interrupt positive delta limit array (similar to 6428h
6000h
6002h
6100h
6102h
Digital-input-8-bit array (see DS 401)
X Polarity digital-input-8-bit array (see DS 401)
Digital-input-16-bit array (see DS 401)
X Polarity digital-input-16-bit array (see DS 401)
Chapter 3 CAN-Bus CANopen
3-19
CAN-Bus CANopen
6120h
6122h
6200h
Digital-input-32-bit array (see DS 401)
X Polarity digital-input-32-bit array (see DS 401
Digital-output-8-bit array (see DS 401)
6202h
X Polarity digital-output-8-bit array (see DS 401)
6206h
X Fault mode digital-output-8-bit array (see DS 401)
6207h
X Fault State Digital-output-8-bit array (see DS 401)
6300h
Digital-output-16-bit array (see DS 401)
6302h
X Polarity digital-output-16-bit array (see DS 401)
6306h
X Fault mode digital-output-16-bit array (see DS 401)
6307h
X Fault state digital-output-16-bit array (see DS 401)
6320h
Digital-output-32-bit array (see DS 401)
6322h
X Polarity digital-output-32-bit array (see DS 401)
6326h
X Fault Mode digital-output-32-bit array (see DS 401)
6327h
X Fault State digital-output-32-bit array (see DS 401)
6401h
Analog-input array (see DS 401)
6402h
Counter-input array (see DS 401)
6404h
CP240-input array (see DS 401)
6411h
Analog-output array (see DS 401)
6412h
Counter-output array (see DS 401)
6414h
6421h
6422h
CP240-output array (see DS401)
X Analog-input interrupt trigger array (see DS 401)
Analog-input interrupt source array (see DS 401)
6423h
X Analog-input interrupt enable (see DS 401)
6424h
X Analog-input interrupt upper limit array (see DS 401)
6425h
X Analog-input interrupt lower Limit array (see DS 401)
6426h
X Analog-input interrupt delta Limit array (see DS 401)
6427h
X Analog-input interrupt negative delta Limit Array (see DS 401)
6428h
X Analog-input interrupt positive delta Limit Array (see DS 401)
6443h
X Fault Mode analog-output array (see DS 401)
6444h
X Fault State analog-output array (see DS 401)
Entries with a gray background are available from software release 2.03 (index 100A)!
All entries identified by an “x” are saved in the EEPROM. When you change the current
configuration all the parameter settings are erased.
A detailed description of the structure and contents of all these objects is
available from “CiA Communication Profile DS-301 Version 3.0” and “CiA
Device Profile for I/O-Modules DS 401 Version 1.4". All error messages
(according to DS 301) required for the SDO transfers have been implemented using “Error-Class”, “Error-Code” and “Additional-Code”.
3-20
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
3
Emergency Object
The VIPA CAN-Bus coupler is provided with the emergency object to
notify other devices connected to the CANopen bus with highest priority in
the event that an internal error has occurred.
The emergency message employs the COB-Identifier that is pre-set at
boot-up in the variable 1014h of the object directory in hexadecimal representation: 080h + Module-ID.
Contents of CANopen EMERGENCY-message:
Byte-no.
Contents
0
Emergency Error Code (DS-301) low Byte
1
Emergency Error Code (DS-301) high Byte
2
Emergency Error Register (DS-301)
3
Application specific Error Code
4
Additional Error Information 1
5
Additional Error Information 2
6
Additional Error Information 3
7
Additional Error Information
Emergency messages are transmitted under the following conditions:
1. When the reset procedure has been completed an emergency message
with a length = 0 is transmitted.
2. When a bus-coupler goes to STOP-mode due to a communication error
on the back panel bus an emergency message with error code = 1000h
(”Generic Error”), error register = 81h (”Generic Error” and ”Manufacturer specific Error” and length = 8 as well as additional error information is
transmitted (see table below).
3. When a diagnostic or a process alarm occurs in an analog module an
emergency message with error code = 1000h (”Generic Error”), error
register = 81h (”Generic Error” and ”Manufacturer specific Error” and
length = 8 as well as additional error information is transmitted (see table
below).
4. When the diagnostic or process alarm disappears from an analog
module an emergency message with error code = 0000h (”No Error”),
error register = 00h (”No Error”) and length = 8 as well as additional error
information is transmitted.
Chapter 3 CAN-Bus CANopen
3-21
CAN-Bus CANopen
Additional error information for application specific errors:
3-22
Error detected
Byte 3 Byte 4
Byte 5
Byte 6
Byte7
Error during initialization of
back panel modules
0x01
0x00
0x00
0x00
0x0
Error during module
configuration check
0x02
Plug-in
locat. no.
Number of
modules
Retries
0x0
Error when checking module
indices
0x03
0x00
0x00
0x00
0x0
Error when reading from
digital inputs
0x10
0x00
0x00
0x00
0x0
Error when writing to digital
outputs
0x11
0x00
0x00
0x00
0x0
Error when reading from
analog inputs
0x20
Plug-in
locat. no.
Channel
number
Byte
counter
0x0
Error when writing to analog
outputs
0x21
Plug-in
locat. no.
Channel
number
Byte
counter
0x0
Error when reading from
counter inputs
0x22
Plug-in
locat. no.
Channel
number
Byte
counter
0x0
Error when writing to counter
outputs
0x23
Plug-in
locat. no.
Channel
number
Byte
counter
0x0
Error when reading from the
CP240-module
0x24
Plug-in
locat. no.
Channel
number
Byte
counter
0x0
Error when writing to the
CP240 module
0x25
Plug-in
locat. no.
Channel
number
Byte
counter
0x0
Error when reading from the
FM254-module
0x26
Plug-in
locat. no.
Channel
number
Byte
counter
0x0
Error when writing to the
FM254 module
0x27
Plug-in
locat. no.
Channel
number
Byte
counter
0x0
Error when writing analog
parameters
0x30
Plug-in
locat. no.
Byte
counter
Parameter
record
length
0x0
Error when writing counter
parameters
0x31
Plug-in
locat. no.
Byte
counter
Parameter
record
length
0x0
Error when writing to the
CP240 parameters
0x32
Plug-in
locat. no.
Byte
counter
Parameter
record
length
0x0
Error when writing to the
FM254 parameters
0x33
Plug-in
locat. no.
Byte
counter
Parameter
record
length
0x0
Diagnostic alarm from an
analog module
0x40 + Diagnostic
Locat. Byte 1
Diagnostic
Byte 2
Diagnostic
Byte 3
Diagnostic
Byte
Process alarm from an analog
module
0x80 + Diagnostic
Locat. Byte 1
Diagnostic
Byte 2
Diagnostic
Byte 3
Diagnostic
Byte
Configuration error of the
CAN-Bus coupler
0xAA
Highbyte
SDO-Index
Lowbyte
SDO-Index
Subindex
0x0
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
3
Network management (NMT) provides the global services specifications for
network supervision and management. This includes the sign-on and signoff of the different network devices, the supervision of these devices as
well as the processing of exceptions.
NMT-service messages have the COB-Identifier 0000h. An additional
module-ID is not required. The length is always 2 data bytes. The first data
byte contains the NMT-Command specifier:
NMT-Services of the Advantech CAN-Bus coupler (DS 301):
(10)
(6): " Start_Remote_Node"
NMT-Command specifier: 01h
Initialise
Hardware
(7): " Stop_Remote_Node"
NMT-Command specifier: 02h
(12)
(11)
(8): " Enter_Pre-operational_State"
NMT-Command specifier: 80h
Initialise
Communication
(10): " Reset_Node"
NMT-Command specifier: 81h
(12)
(10)
(11)
Pre-Operational
(11): " Reset_Communication"
NMT-Command specifier: 82h
(8)
(8)
(10)
(11)
(7)
Prepared
(6)
(10)
(11)
(12): I nitialization complete
enter Pre-operational
aut omatically
Operational
(7)
(6)
The second data byte contains the module-ID (00h for a Broadcast Command).
Chapter 3 CAN-Bus CANopen
3-23
CAN-Bus CANopen
Node Guarding
The bus coupler also supports the Node Guarding object as defined by
CANopen to ensure that other devices on the bus are supervised properly.
Node Guarding operation is started when the first guard requests (RTR) is
received from the master. The respective COB identifier is permanently set
to 700h + module-ID at variable 100Eh in the object directory. If the coupler
does not receive a guard request message from the master within the
“Guard-Time” (object 100Ch) when the node-guarding mode is active the
module assumes that the master is not operating properly. When the time
determined by the product of “Guard-Time” (100Ch) and “Life-Time-Factor”
(100Dh) has expired the module will automatically assume the status “Pre
Operational”.
When either the “Guard-Time” (object 100Ch) or the “Life-Time-Factor”
(100Dh) has been set to zero by an SDO download from the master, the
expiry of the guard time is not monitored and the module remains in its
current operating mode.
Heartbeat
From software version V2.03 (Index 100A) the Advantech CAN-coupler also
supports the Heartbeat Mode in addition to Node Guarding.
When a value is entered into index 1017h (Heartbeat Producer Time) then
the device status (Operational, Pre-Operational, ...) of the bus coupler is
transferred by means of the COB-Identifier (700h+module-Id) when the
Heartbeat-timer expires.
The Heartbeat mode starts automatically as soon as the index 1017h
contains a value that is larger than 0.
3-24
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
3
The structure of the process image
8xdigital In
8xdigital In
4xanalog In
Counter
16xdigital I/O
32xdigital Out
4xanalog Out
32xdigital In
8xdigital In
ID- Nr. : 5
CAN-coupler
When the bus coupler is turned on it determines the configuration of the
input and output devices that have been installed. The allocation of the
physical locations of the input/output channels to addresses in the process
image is performed automatically by the bus coupler. The configuration of
these input and output channels are stored in the process image.
Digital signals are single bit binary signals which means that every
channel is associated with a bit located in the process image.
Analog signals are word oriented, i.e. every channel is associated with a
word located in the process image.
Input and output data use different memory areas.
The bus coupler enters the input bits into its input buffer and transfers the
contents of the output buffer to the outputs.
The configuration shown at the left explains the assignment of the I/Os to
the process data.
P DO's i n the CAN-coupler
S end-P DO's (i nputs)
1. di gi tal- P DO
By te 0
By te 1
By te 2
Modul-ID h+ By te 3
180h (perm.)
By te 4
By te 5
By te 6
By te 7
1. analog-P DO
By te 0
By te 1
By te 2
Modul-ID h+ By te 3
280h (perm.)
By te 4
By te 5
By te 6
By te 7
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
2. digi t al-PDO
Byt e 0
By te 1
Byt e 2
Modul-IDh+
Byt e 3
380h (perm.)
Byt e 4
Byt e 5
Byt e 6
Byt e 7
2. analog-P DO
By te 0
By te 1
By te 2
Modul-ID h+ By te 3
480h
By te 4
By te 5
By te 6
By te 7
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
R eceive-P DO's (outputs)
1. di gi tal-PD O
By te 0
By te 1
By te 2
Modul-I Dh+ By te 3
200h (perm.)
By te 4
By te 5
By te 6
By te 7
1. analog-PD O
By te 0
By te 1
By te 2
Modul-I Dh+ By te 3
300h (perm.) By te 4
By te 5
By te 6
By te 7
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
2. analog-PD O
By te 0
By te 1
By te 2
Modul-I Dh+ By te 3
400h (perm.)
By te 4
By te 5
By te 6
By te 7
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
3. analog-PD O
By te 0
By te 1
By te 2
Modul-I Dh+ By te 3
500h (perm.) By te 4
By te 5
By te 6
By te 7
Channel 1
Chapter 3 CAN-Bus CANopen
3-25
CAN-Bus CANopen
Configuration of the CAN bus coupler
The configuration procedure for a CAN-Bus coupler is explained by means
of an example.
Example 1
Define the configuration of a CAN-Bus coupler as follows:
Attention!
Always insert the bus-coupler at the left and the modules to the right of
the bus-coupler.
3-26
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
3
1. Prepare a configuration table
To simplify the configuration we recommend that you prepare a table as
shown below:
Plug-in locat. no.:
Module type
0
1
CAN
BM
DI8
2
3
4
5
DI32 AO4 D032 DIO16
6
AI4
9FC1 9FC3 A5E0 AFD8 BFD2 15C4
7
8
FM250 DI8
9
Tota
DI8
Module identifier
-
Number of bytes DI
-
1
4
-
-
2
-
-
1
1
9
Number of bytes AI
-
-
-
-
-
-
8
8
-
-
16
-
-
6
10
-
-
18
Number of bytes DO
-
-
-
-
4
2
-
Number of bytes AO
-
-
-
8
-
-
-
B5F4 9FC1 9FC1
2. Read the module identifier
The configuration on the back panel bus can be retrieved by means of the
module list using the SDO read command in your master configuration
tool.
The result is only used to check and verify the table above.
Index
Subindex
Result
Value (hex)
1027
0
Number of installed modules
9
1027
1
Module identifier plug-in loc. 1
9FC1
1027
2
Module identifier plug-in loc. 2
9FC3
1027
3
Module identifier plug-in loc. 3
A5E0
1027
4
Module identifier plug-in loc. 4
AFD8
1027
5
Module identifier plug-in loc. 5
BFD2
1027
6
Module identifier plug-in loc. 6
15C4
1027
7
Module identifier plug-in loc. 7
B5F4
1027
8
Module identifier plug-in loc. 8
9FC1
1027
9
Module identifier plug-in loc. 9
9FC
Note!
A summary of the module identifiers is located at the end of the chapter.
Chapter 3 CAN-Bus CANopen
3-27
CAN-Bus CANopen
3. Preparation of the send-PDO’s
PDO-Type
Length Byte 0
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
Byte 5
Byte 6
Byte 7
8
DI8
Plug-in
loc. "1"
DI32
Plug-in
loc."2"
DI32
Plug-in
loc. "2"
DI32
Plug-in
loc. "2"
DI32
Plug-in
loc. "2"
DIO16
Plug-in
loc. "5"
DIO16
Plug-in
loc. "5"
DI8
Plug-in
loc. "8"
PDO2S2M 280h +
NodeID
640dec+NodeID
8
AI4
Plug-in
loc. "6"
AI4
Plug-in
loc. "6"
AI4
Plug-in
loc. "6"
AI4
Plug-in
loc. "6"
AI4
Plug-in
loc. "6"
AI4
Plug-in
loc. "6"
AI4
Plug-in
loc. "6"
AI4
Plug-in
loc. "6"
PDO3S2M 380h +
NodeID
896dec+NodeID
1
DI8
Plug-in
loc."9"
PDO4S2M 480h +
NodeID
1152dec+NodeID
8
FM250
Plug-in
loc. "7"
FM250
Plug-in
loc. "7"
FM250
Plug-in
loc. "7"
FM250
Plug-in
loc. "7"
FM250
Plug-in
loc. "7"
FM250
Plug-in
loc."7"
FM250
Plug-in
loc."7"
FM250
Plug-in
loc."7"
PDO5S2M 680h +
NodeID
1664dec+NodeID
not
valid
PDO1S2M 180h +
NodeID
384dec+NodeID
For verification purposes you can read the respective COB-IDs via index
1800-1804 sub-index 1.
Lenth
Byte 0
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
Byte 5
PDO1M2S 200h +
NodeID
512dec+NodeID
PDO-Typ
6
DO32
Plug-in
loc. “4”
DO32
Plug-in
loc. “4”
DO32
Plug-in
loc. “4”
DO32
Plug-in
loc. “4”
DIO16
Plug-in
loc. “5”
DIO16
Plug-in
loc. “5“
Byte 6
Byte 7
PDO2M2S 300h +
NodeID
768dec+NodeID
8
AO4
Plug-in
loc. “3”
AO4
Plug-in
loc. “3”
AO4
Plug-in
loc. “3”
AO4
Plug-in
loc. “3”
AO4
Plug-in
loc. “3”
AO4
Plug-in
loc. “3”
AO4
Plug-in
loc. “3”
AO4
Plug-in
loc. “3“
PDO3M2S 400h +
NodeID
1024dec+NodeID
8
FM250
Plug-in
loc. “7”
FM250
Plug-in
loc. “7”
FM250
Plug-in
loc. “7”
FM250
Plug-in
loc. “7”
FM250
Plug-in
loc. “7”
FM250
Plug-in
loc. “7”
FM250
Plug-in
loc. “7”
FM250
Plug-in
loc. “7“
PDO4M2S 500h +
NodeID
1280dec+NodeID
2
FM250
Plug-in
loc. “7”
FM250
Plug-in
loc. “7“
PDO5M2S 680h +
NodeID
1920dec+NodeID
not
valid
4. Preparation of the receive-PDO’s
For verification purposes you can read the respective COB-IDs via index
1400-1404 sub-index 1.
3-28
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
3
5. Configuration of send- and receive-PDO’s in the master-con-figuration tool
The respective PDO’s must be configured in the master configuration tool.
The configuration procedure is described in the respective manuals.
6. Configuration of analog modules
Analog- and counter modules are configured in the object directory.
The first analog module consists of an AO4*12-Bit and this must be
configured for +10V. The module is configured via the object directory
entry 3001.
Operation
Index
Subindex
Default (h)
Read
3001
0
04
Value (h)
04
Read
3001
1
40000101
40000101
Read
3001
2
01010000
01010000
Read
3001
3
00000000
00000000
Read
3001
4
00000000
Write
3001
1
40000505
Write
3001
2
0505000
00000000
The second analog module consists of an AI4*16-Bit and this must be
configured for +/-10V. The module is configured via the object directory
entry 3002.
Operation
Index
Subindex
Default (h)
Read
3002
0
04
Value (h)
04
Read
3002
1
2E2E0000
40002E2E
Read
3002
2
2E2E0000
2E2E0000
Read
3002
3
00000000
00000000
Read
3002
4
00000000
Write
3002
1
40002B2B
Write
3002
2
2B2B000
00000000
The counter module FM250 must be configured to operate in mode 2. The
module is configured via the object directory entry 3402.
Operation
Index
Subindex
Default (h)
Read
3402
0
01
Value (h)
01
Read
3402
1
0000
0000
Write
3402
1
020
Chapter 3 CAN-Bus CANopen
3-29
CAN-Bus CANopen
7. Enable analog send-PDO’s
By default the analog send-PDO’s are blocked and they must be enabled
by the user.
For our example this means that the PDO’s for AI-module in plug-in
location 6 and the counter module in plug-in location 7 must be enabled.
You have tow options to enable analog PDO’s:
1. You can program an event-time by means of index 1800-1804 sub-index
5. When the timer expires the PDO is transferred irrespective of whether
the data has been modified or not.
2. Interrupts for DS401 must be enabled for all the analog and counter
inputs.
A: Enabling the analog input interrupt
Operation
Index
Subindex
Default (h)
Read
6423
0
00
Write
6423
0
Value (h)
00
FF
B: Enabling the interrupt for the different analog channels.
Definition of the number of analog channels:
Operation
Index
Subindex
Value
Read
6421
0
4
Index 0 of every object directory entry contains the number of available
entries.
The AI-module has 4 analog channels. At this point the interrupts must be
enabled for every channel.
Operation
Index
Subindex
Default (h)
Read
6421
1
00
Write
6421
1
Read
6421
2
Write
6421
2
Read
6421
3
Write
6421
3
Read
6421
4
Write
6421
4
Value (h)
00
FF
00
00
FF
00
00
FF
00
00
FF
The PDO’s are transferred when the data has changed. For the analog
input modules you can specify a delta-limit, upper-limit or lower-limit
which will cause the transfer of the PDO’s.
3-30
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
Operation
Index
Subindex
Default (h)
Value (h)
Read
6426
1
0000FFFF
0000FFFF
Write
6426
1
Read
6426
2
0000FFFF
0000FFFF
Write
6426
2
Read
6426
3
0000FFFF
0000FFFF
Write
6426
3
Read
6426
4
0000FFFF
0000FFFF
Write
6426
4
3
00000000
00000000
00000000
0000000
C: Enabling the counter input interrupts
Operation
Index
Subindex
Default (h)
Value (h)
Read
3423
0
00
00
Write
3423
0
F
D: Enabling the interrupts for the different counter channels.
Determination of the number of counter channels:
Operation
Index
Subindex
Value
Read
3421
0
2
Index 0 of every object directory entry contains the number of available
entries.
The FM-module has 2 counter channels. Only the interrupts must be
enabled for each channel.
Operation
Index
Subindex
Default(h)
Read
3421
1
00
Write
3421
1
Read
3421
2
Write
3421
2
Value (h)
00
FF
00
00
F
The PDO’s are transferred when the data has changed. For the counte
modules you can specify a delta-limit, upper-limit or lower-limit which will
cause the transfer of the PDO’s.
Operation
Index
Subindex
Default(h)
Value (h)
Read
3426
1
FFFFFFFF
FFFFFFFF
Write
3426
1
Read
3426
2
FFFFFFFF
FFFFFFFF
Write
3426
2
00000000
0000000
8. Enabling the operation of the CAN Bus coupler
The device status of the CAN Bus coupler must be set to operational to
allow it to transfer data. When the status of the bus coupler is operational it
will reply with the input data.
Chapter 3 CAN-Bus CANopen
3-31
CAN-Bus CANopen
Example 2
The following example is intended to explain the configuration of a CANBus coupler. The master consists of the CANopen master for 115U, 135U
and 155U of ANTAL ELECTRONIC. The respective manual contains
detailed specifications about the CAN-Bus master and it’s commissioning.
Digital inputs
Digital outputs
Analog inputs
Analog outputs
4xanalog In
8xdigital Out
8xdigital In
8xdigital In
ID-Nr.: 5
CAN-Coupler
Here we are required to configure two CAN-Bus couplers as follows:
Coupler 1:
2 x 8 bit = 2 bytes
1 x 8 bit = 1 byte
8 x 8 bit = 8 bytes
-
(1 PDO tx)
(1 PDO rx)
(1 PDO tx)
Digital inputs
Digital outputs
Analog inputs
Analog outputs
1 x 16 bit = 2 bytes
1 x 8 bit = 1 bytes
8 x 8 bit = 8 bytes
8 x 8 bit = 8 bytes
16xdigital In
8xdigital Out
4xanalog Out
4xanalog In
ID-Nr. 11
CAN-Coupler
Coupler 2:
(1 PDO tx)
(1 PDO rx)
(1 PDO tx)
(1 PDO rx)
We recommend that you start with the preparation of a cross-reference list
to improve the troubleshooting facilities and to reduce the time required for
commissioning. Into this cross-reference list you must enter all I/O modules
along with CAN-identifiers and byte length.
3-32
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
3
Example continued ...
The PDO numbers start from 0. Every PDO consists of 8 bytes.
The example results in the following cross-reference:
Digital input
ID-no.
Byte length
PDO-no.
5
Address
1
0
5
1
0
11
2
0
Digital output
ID-no.
Byte length
PDO-no.
5
Address
1
0
11
1
0
Analog input
ID-no.
Byte length
PDO-no.
5
Address
8
1
11
8
1
Byte length
PDO-no.
8
1
Analog output
ID-no.
Address
11
When the cross-reference has been prepared you can allocate the CAN-Bus
couplers to the S5-addresses.
Let us assume that you wish to allocate the following addresses:
Coupler 1: digital inputs
digital outputs
analog inputs
from EB8
from AB8
from EB144
Coupler 2: digital inputs
digital outputs
analog inputs
analog outputs
from EB32
from AB32
from EB170
from AB170
Chapter 3 CAN-Bus CANopen
3-33
CAN-Bus CANopen
Example continued ...
This results in the following addresses for the cross-reference:
Digital input
ID-no.
Address
Byte length
PDO-no.
5
EB8
2
0
11
EB32
2
0
ID-no.
Address
Byte length
PDO-no.
5
AB8
1
0
11
AB32
1
0
ID-no.
Address
Byte length
PDO-no.
5
EB144
8
1
11
EB170
8
1
ID-no.
Address
Byte length
PDO-no.
5
EB144
8
1
11
EB170
8
1
Digital output
Analog input
Analog output
This makes it a simple matter to program the allocation data module. As
mentioned before, the example above refers to the CAN bus master supplied
by ANTAL ELECTRONIC.
The allocation data module has a fixed format of variable length. The
module (except for DB0 and DB1) may be chosen as required. Where a PLC
must support more than one interface module a separate data module is
required for each board.
The allocation is made in groups. The sequence of these groups is fixed and
mandatory:
Group 1: Master Parameter
Group 2: Synchronous devices
Group 3: Asynchronous digital inputs
Group 4: Asynchronous digital outputs
Group 5: Analog inputs
Group 6: Analog outputs
Group 7: Communication modules
Groups (even unused ones!) must be separated by means of two data
words containing KH=FFFF. The Master Parameter group is the only
exception.
3-34
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
3
Example continued ...
These specifications result in the following data module, in this example
DB7:
DB7 - Allocation data module:
1: KY = 000,000 0, no synchronous operations
2: KY = 000,200 Master-ID, base address of the SDO channel
3: KH = FFFF
End of the group
4: KH = FFFF
Synchronous devices
5: KY = 005,008 ID-no. 5, initial address EB8
6: KY = 002,000 Byte length 2, PDO-no. 0
7: KY = 011,032 ID-no. 11, start address EB32
8: KY = 02,000
Byte length 2, PDO-no. 0
9: KH = FFFF
End of the group
10: KH = FFFF
Digital inputs
11: KY = 005,008 ID-no. 5, initial address AB8
12: KY = 001,000 Byte length 1, PDO-no. 0
13: KY = 011,032 ID-no. 11, start address AB32
14: KY = 001,000 Byte length 1, PDO-no. 0
15: KH = FFFF
End of the group
16: KH = FFFF
Digital outputs
17: KY = 005,144 ID-no. 5, initial address EB144
18: KY = 008,001 Byte length 8, PDO-no. 1
19: KY = 011,170 ID-no. 11, start address EB170
20: KY = 008,001 Byte length 8, PDO-no. 1
21: KH = FFFF
End of the group
22: KH = FFFF
Analog inputs
23: KY = 011,170 ID-no. 11, initial address AB170
24: KY = 008,001 Byte length 8, PDO-no. 1
25: KH = FFFF
End of the group
26: KH = FFFF
Analog outputs
27: KH = FFFF
End of the group
28: KH = FFFF
Communication modules
Link DB7 to your system by means of FB209. You can obtain further
information from the CAN master manual that is supplied by ANTAL
ELECTRONIC.
Chapter 3 CAN-Bus CANopen
3-35
CAN-Bus CANopen
Module identifiers
The following table contains the identifiers of all ADAM-8000 modules and
the number of bytes used by the modules.
I/O-module type
3-36
Identifier (h)
Number of
digital input
bytes
Number of
analog input
bytes
Number of
digital output
bytes
Number of
analog output
bytes
DI 8 Bit
0x9FC1
1
-
-
-
DI 16 Bit
0x9FC2
2
-
-
-
DI 32 Bit
0x9FC4
4
-
-
-
DO 8 Bit
0xAFC8
-
-
1
-
DO 16 Bit
0xAFD0
-
-
2
-
DO 32 Bit
0xAFD8
-
-
4
-
DIO 8 Bit
0xBFC9
1
-
1
-
DIO 16 Bit
0xBFD2
2
-
2
-
AI4x12Bit
0x15C4
-
8
-
-
AO4x12Bit
0xA5E0
-
-
-
8
AI2/AO2x12Bit
0x35DD
-
4
-
4
CP240
0x1CC1
16
-
16
-
FM 250
0xB5F4
-
8
-
10
FM250-SSI
0xB5DB
-
4
-
4
FM 254
0x18CB
-
12
-
12
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
3
Technical data
CANopen coupler IM 253 CAN
Electrical data
ADAM 8253-1CA00
Power supply
24 VDC, ext. power supply connected to the front
Current consumption
700mA max.
Isolation
≥500 VAC
Status indicator
by means of LED’s located on the front
Connectors/interfaces
9-pin D-type (socket) CAN-Bus connection
CAN-Bus interface
Connection
9-pin D-type plug
Network topology
Linear bus, active bus termination at one end, radial spur-lines permitted.
Medium
Screened three-core cable, unscreened cable permitted -depending on
environment.
Data transfer rate
10 kBps to 1 MBps
Max. overall length
1000 m at 50 kBps, without repeaters
Digital inputs/outputs
Any combination of a max. of 16 I/O modules per coupler.
Max. no. of stations
127 stations (depending on the master interface
Combination with peripheral modules
max. no. of modules
32
max. digital I/O
40 bytes each (40 bytes = 5 PDO’s x 8)
max. analog I/O
16 words each
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm
25, 4 x 76 x 76
Weight
80g
Chapter 3 CAN-Bus CANopen
3-37
CAN-Bus CANopen
3-38
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
DeviceNet
4
DeviceNet
Overview
This chapter contains the description of the Advantech DeviceNet-slave.
The introduction to the system is followed by the description of the
module. Another section of this chapter concerns the configuration by
means of the DeviceNet-Manager of Allen - Bradley This section describes
the configuration of the DeviceNet-coupler and the configuration of the
System 200V modules.
A summary of the diagnostic messages, the procedure for connecting the
DeviceNet-coupler to the Profibus and the technical data conclude the
chapter.
Below follows a description of:
• DeviceNet principles
• Hardware description of the Advantech DeviceNet-coupler IM 253 DN
• Configuration by means of the DeviceNet-Manager inc. examples
• Diagnostics
• Interfacing options for Profibus
• Technical data
Ordering details DeviceNet
4-2
Type
Order number
Description
IM 253 DN
ADAM 8253-1DN00
DeviceNet-couple
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
4
System overview
You can use the Advantech DeviceNet-coupler coupler to link up to 32
modules (of 40 bytes each) of your ADAM-8000 periphery by means of
DeviceNet. The following DeviceNet-components are currently available
from Advantech.
ADAM 8253-1DN00
Ordering details DeviceNet
Type
IM 253 DN
Order number
Description
ADAM 8253-1DN00
DeviceNet-couple
Chapter 4 DeviceNet
4-3
DeviceNet
Principles
General
DeviceNet is an open Low-End network that is based upon the physical
properties of CAN-Bus. The bus is also used to supply the devices with the
required 24 VDC power.
You can use DeviceNet to install direct connections between your control
system and simple industrial devices like sensors and switches as well as
technologically advanced devices like frequency converters and bar-code
readers.
DeviceNet
Direct interfacing improves communications between the different devices
and provides important diagnostic facilities at the device level.
DeviceNet is an open device-net standard that satisfies the user profile for
industrial real-time system applications.
The DeviceNet protocol has an open specification that is the property of
and administered by the independent vendor organization “Open DeviceNet Vendor Association” ODVA.
This is where standardized device profiles are created to provide compatibility and exchangeability on logical level for simple devices of the same type.
In contrast to the classical source-destination model, DeviceNet uses a
modern producer/consumer-model that requires data packets with identifier
fields for the identification of the data.
This approach caters for multiple priority levels, more efficient transfers of I/
O-data and multiple consumers for the data.
A device that has data to send produces the data on the network together
with an identifier. All devices requiring data listen for messages. When a
device recognizes a suitable identifier they act and consume the respective
data.
DeviceNet carries two types of messages:
• I/O-messages
Messages that are subject to critical timing constraints and that are
contain data for control purposes that can be exchanged by means of a
single or multiple connections and that employ identifiers with a high
priority.
4-4
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
4
Chapter
• Explicit messages
These are used to establish multi-purpose point-to-point communication
paths between two devices. These are used for the configuration of
network couplers and for diagnostic purposes. These functions usually
employ identifiers of a low priority.
Messages that are longer than 8 bytes are subject to the fragmentation
service. A set of rules for Master/Slave-, Peer-to-Peer- and Multi-Master
connections is also available.
Communication medium
DeviceNet employs a master-line/spur-line topology with up to 64 network
nodes. The maximum distance is either 500m at a rate of 125kBaud, 250m at a
rate of 250kBaud or 100m at a rate of 500kBaud.
The length of the spur-lines can be up 6m while the total length of all spur
lines depends on the Baudrate.
Network nodes can be removed from or inserted into the network without
interruption of the network operation. New stations and failed stations are
detected automatically.
DeviceNet employs a screened five-core cable the data communication
medium.
DeviceNet uses differential voltages and for this reason it exhibits less
sensitivity to interference than a voltage or current-based interface.
Signaling and power supply conductors are included in the same network
cable. It is therefore possible to connect devices that obtain the operating
voltage via the network as well as devices with an integrated power supply.
Furthermore it is possible to connect redundant power supplies to the
network that can guarantees the power supply when required.
Bus-access method
DeviceNet operates according to the Carrier-Sense Multiple Access
(CSMA) principle, i.e. every station on the network can access the bus
when it is not occupied (random access).
The exchange of messages is message oriented and not station oriented.
Each message is provided with a unique and priorizing identifier. At any
time only one station can occupy the bus with its messages.
The DeviceNet bus access control is subject to non-destructive, bit-wise
arbitration. In this case non-destructive means that the successful station
Chapter 4 DeviceNet
4-5
DeviceNet
participating in the arbitration must not re-send its message. The most
important station is selected automatically when multiple stations access
the bus simultaneously. If station that is ready to send recognizes that the
bus is occupied its send request is delayed until the current transfer has
been completed.
Addressing
All stations on the bus must be uniquely identified by means of an IDaddress. Every DeviceNet device has addressing facilities.
EDS-File
The properties of the DeviceNet units are supplied to you in the form of an
EDS-file (Electronic Data Sheet) to configure a slave interface by means of
your configuration tool.
4-6
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
4
Advantech DeviceNet-coupler
The DeviceNet coupler IM 253 DN provides a simple method of interfacing
any decentralized peripheral modules by means of the DeviceNet protocol.
Properties
• Group 2 only Device
- employs the predefined connection set
• Poll only Device
- no BIT STROBE mode support
- no CHANGE OF STATE support
• Supports all Baudrates: 125, 250 and 500kBaud
• Address selection by means of switches
• Definition of the data rate by means of a special
POWER ON procedure (start from address 90...92)
• LED status indicators
• a max. of 32 peripheral modules can be installed
• of these a max. of 8 can be configurable modules
• Module configuration by means of the DeviceNet manager
• Profibus-DeviceNet conversion is possible by combining the unit with a
IM 208 DP
Front view ADAM8253-1DN00
ADAM 8253-1DN00
Chapter 4 DeviceNet
4-7
DeviceNet
Components
LED’s
4 LED’s on the front allow for the quick troubleshooting the current status
of the module. A detailed description of the troubleshooting procedure by
means of the LED’s and the back panel is available in a section of the
chapter on “Troubleshooting”.
Name
Color
Description
PW
yellow
Power-LED: supply voltage available
ER
red
DeviceNet or back panel bus bus error
RD
green
Back panel bus status
BA
yellow
DeviceNet statu
DeviceNet interfacing
The DeviceNet connection is provided by by a 5-pin Open Style connector.
The pin assignment is imprinted on the front of the module.
Address selector
The address selector is used for:
• the definition of the unique DeviceNet address
• programming of the data rate
Addresses:
0...63: DeviceNet address
90, 91, 92: set communication rate to 125, 250, 500 kBaud
Power supply
The bus coupler is provided with an integrated power supply. The power
supply is protected from reverse polarity connections and over current
conditions and it is isolated galvanically from the Fieldbus.
4-8
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
4
Chapter
The power supply provides a max. of 3A to the circuitry of the module as
well as the peripheral modules via the back panel bus.
The power supply must be connected to a 24 VDC ±15% power unit via two
terminals located on the front of the module.
Note!
The DeviceNet-coupler does not require any current from the power that
is available via the DeviceNet.
Block diagram
The following block diagram shows the hardware structure of the bus
coupler in principle as well as the internal communications:
galvanic isolation
(by means of opto-coupler and DC/DC converter)
CAN Tr ansceiver
DeviceNet-Bus
Data
Exchange
EPROM
Reset
Error
Mikrocontrollerbus
CAN-Bus
Controller
Clock
BA
Mikrocont roller
Clock
Volt age
monitor
Reset
Address
selector
ADAM-8000
interface circuitry
Power
24V
(terminals)
Pow er
supply
24V / 5V
+5V
ADAM-8000
back panel bus
Chapter 4 DeviceNet
4-9
DeviceNet
Configuration by means of the DeviceNet manager
Overview
The DeviceNet is configured by means of the DeviceNet-Manager software
of Allen - Bradley.
The following steps are necessary for the configuration:
• Configuration of the DeviceNet-Manager
• Setting the communication rate and the Node-Address of the module
• Test on the DeviceNet
• Module configuration
• I/O-addressing of the DeviceNet-scanner (Master)
Configuration of the DeviceNet manager
During the configuration the module specific data of the ADAM-8000
DeviceNet coupler are defined and supplied to the DeviceNet manager.
The following steps are required:
• Insert the supplied diskette into your PC.
• Copy the file IM253DN.BMP to your PC into the directory/DNETMGR/
RES of the DeviceNet-Manager
• The EDS-file is located in a sub-directory of 501.VND on the diskette.
Copy the file 1.EDS into the directory /DNETMGR/EDS/501.VND/
0.TYP/1.COD
You can also copy the entire tree
501.vnd
|— 0.typ
|—1.cod
|— 1.eds
|— device.bmp
into the directory DNETMGR/EDS.
4-10
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
4
Specifying Baudrate and Node-Address
You can set the baud rate as well as the Node-Address when the power has
been turned off. These will be transferred into the module when you turn
the respective power supply on.
Setting the comunication rate
All stations connected to the bus communicate at the same data rate. You
can define the required data rate by means of the address selector.
• Turn the power supply off
• Set the address selector to the required Baudrate
Setting
Baudrate in kBaud
90
125
91
250
92
500
• Turn the power supply on
The selected communication rate is saved to the EEPROM.
At this point your DeviceNet-coupler is set to the correct Baudrate.
LED-indicator RD-LED ER-LED
When the Baudrate has been saved successfully the RD-LED (green) will
be turned on.
When the data rate was selected incorrectly the ER-LED will be turned on.
Setting the DeviceNet Address
All stations connected to the bus must have a unique DeviceNet address.
The address can be defined by means of the address selector when the
supply has been turned off.
• Turn the power supply off
• Set the address selector to the required address.
Please ensure that the address is unique in the system and that is
is located between 0 and 63.
• Turn the power supply on
The selected communication rate is saved to the RAM.
Note!
Any changes to the addressing will only become effective after a POWER
ON or an automatic reset. Changes to settings are not recognized during
normal operations.
LED indicator ER-LED
When the address is bad or if it already exists the ER-LED (red) will be
turned on after power on.
Chapter 4 DeviceNet
4-11
DeviceNet
Test in conjunction with the DeviceNet
Procedure
• Connect the PC containing the DeviceNet-Manager and the Advantech
DeviceNet-coupler to the DeviceNet.
• Define the communication rate and the Node-Address on the coupler
• Turn the power supply to the bus coupler on.
• Start the DeviceNet-Manager.
• Enter the same data rate into the manager that was selected on the bus
coupler
• Start the function NETWORK WHO in the manager
The following network windows is displayed:
Device Details
• Right-click the bus coupler.
• Select the function DEVICE DETAILS in the context menu.
The DEVICE DETAILS box is displayed on screen
Here you can display the Node-Address, the Vendor Code (in this case this
is 501 for Advantech GmbH) and other internal information.
4-12
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
4
Module configuration in the DeviceNet-manager
The ADAM-8000 includes configurable modules like analog modules.
When you are using these modules in conjunction with a DeviceNetcoupler the respective parameters must be saved in the DeviceNet-coupler.
Configuration in groups
The following conditions apply to the configuration:
• Parameter data is managed in groups in DeviceNet.
• Every DeviceNet-coupler can process and store a maximum of 144 bytes
of parameter data.
• These 144 bytes are divided into 8 groups of 18 bytes each.
• Every group can contain the parameter data of 1 module.
• Groups are identified by a Prefix-No. (1...8) in the parameter name.
• The number of parameter bytes is defined in the parameter “Len” (1.
parameter) of a group. The number of parameter bytes is available from
the technical data contained in the documentation on the peripheral
modules.
• The group-allocation for a module does not depend on the location or
the installation sequence.
• The allocation of the plug-in location is defined by means of the “Slot”parameter of a group (2. parameter)
• The values can be entered as bit-patterns when you double-click a
parameter
• Unused groups are identified by a “Value” 0000 0000.
Procedure
Condition: your IM 253 DN coupler is active on the bus.
Below follows a description of how the parameter sets are defined in the
DeviceNet-Manager.
• Execute the function WHO in the DeviceNet-Manager.
This will open a network window that includes your coupler.
• Double-click the icon of the bus couplers for which you want to modify
the parameter data.
Chapter 4 DeviceNet
4-13
DeviceNet
The parameter data is read from the coupler and displayed in the following
window:
• Locate an unused group in the list of parameters (Value=0000 0000) You
can display all 8 groups in the parameter list by entering “All Parameters” into the selection field Parameter Group.
• Double click the “Len”-parameter
The following dialog box is displayed:
• Enter the number of parameter bytes for the module that you are
configuring as a bit-coded definition. You can obtain the number from
the documentation for the peripheral module. Set or reset the respective
bits by clicking the checkbox.
• Click [OK] to close the mask. The next parameter (slot) of the same
group is displayed when you click the button [Next>>].
• Now you must enter the plug-in location no. of the module you are
configuring as a bit-code in the same manner.
You can retrieve the input range by means of the button [Param Help].
• At this point you can enter a sequence of parameter bytes for your
module by clicking [Next >>].
• If you wish to configure other modules you must select another unused
group and proceed in the same manner.
4-14
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
4
• When you have entered all parameters into the different groups you can
transfer and save the parameters in the DeviceNet-coupler by clicking
the [Save to Device] button.
The following selection window is opened when you click [Save to
Device]:
Here you can decide whether you will transfer all the parameters or only
the parameters that were modified.
• During the transfer the “status”-text “Status: downloading” is displayed.
When the transfer has completed the “status”-text changes to “Status:
Device Values”
• If you were to request the “Device Details” the bit CONFIGURED would
also be included.
When you have entered the parameter values and downloaded them into
the DeviceNet-coupler the peripheral modules connected via the back
panel bus have been configured as specified.
Chapter 4 DeviceNet
4-15
DeviceNet
Example
The following example is intended to show the configuration of the ADAM8000. Let us assume that the system has the following structure:
The example shows a DeviceNet-coupler with 10 modules; however, the
modules installed in plug-in locations 1 to 9 can not be configured.
Below follows the description of the configuration of the analog-module in
location 10:
Precondition: - the hardware was assembled ans is active on the bus.
- the Allen - Bradley DeviceNet-Manager was installed.
• Execute the function WHO in the DeviceNet-Manager and open the
parameter window by double-clicking the DeviceNet-coupler.
4-16
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
4
• Locate an unused group in the parameter list (Value=0000 0000)
• Double-click the “Len”-parameter.
The analog-module has 10 bytes of configuration data. Enter this value as a
bit-coded value.
• Click [Next>>] and enter the location 10 as the “Slot”.
• You can now enter the parameter bytes of your module by clicking [Next
>>] repeatedly.
Chapter 4 DeviceNet
4-17
DeviceNet
The analog-input-module has the following parameters
Byte
0
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
Diagnostic alarm-byte
Bit 0 ... 5: reserved
Bit 6: 0: Diagnostic alarm inhibited
1: Diagnostic alarm enabled
Bit 7: reserved
Default
00h
1
reserved
00h
2
Function-no. channel 0 (see module description)
2Dh
3
Function-no. channel 1 (see module description)
2Dh
4
Function-no. channel 2 (see module description)
2Dh
5
Function-no. channel 3 (see module description)
2Dh
6
Option-byte channel 0
00h
7
Option-byte channel 1
00h
8
Option-byte channel 2
00h
9
Option-byte channel 3
00h
• When all parameters have been entered into the group you can transfer
and save the parameters in the DeviceNet-coupler by means of [Save to
Device].
• During the transfer the “status”-text is displayed as “Status:
downloading”. When the transfer has been completed the “status”-text
changes to “Status: Device Values”
Note!
Parameters can be changed at any time. For this purpose you must click
[Load from Device], then enter the required changes and save them by
means of [Save to Device].
4-18
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
4
I/O-addressing of the DeviceNet-scanner
The DeviceNet-coupler determines the modules installed on the back panel
bus automatically and uses the result to generate the number of input and
output bytes.
You must determine these two values when you configure the input/output
modules and enter the in the DeviceNet-scanner (master):
• produced connection size (number of input bytes)
• consumed connection size (number of output bytes)
The addressing results from the sequence of the modules (plug-in location
1 to 32) and the base address that was defined in the DeviceNet-scanner for
the bus coupler.
DeviceNet-Scanner configuration
• Set the DeviceNet-Scanner to connection type POLL IO.
• Define the parameters:
“Receive data size” = number of input bytes
“Transmit data size” = number of output bytes
• Define the base address (mapping) of receive data and transmit data in
as required.
• Activate the DeviceNet-coupler IM 253 DN in the scan list.
• Start the DeviceNet-Scanner.
When the DeviceNet-Scanners has been configured the input and output
modules are accessible via the defined addresses.
Example
The following 6 modules have been installed into the back panel bus:
The result is:
Plug-in
location
Installed module
Input data
Slot 0
DeviceNet-coupler
-
Slot 1
Digital Out SM 222
Slot 2
Digital Out SM 222
Slot 3
Digital In SM 221
1 Byte
Slot 4
Analog In SM 231
4 Words
Slot 5
Analog Out SM 232
Total:
Output data
1 Byte
1 Byte
4 Words
1+4*2=9 Byte
1+1+4*2=10 Byte
• produced connection size: 9 bytes (sum of input bytes)
• consumed connection size: 10 bytes (sum of output bytes)
Chapter 4 DeviceNet
4-19
DeviceNet
Diagnostics
Overview
The LED’s installed to display the status allow for extensive diagnostics
during the POWER ON - procedure as well as operation. The result of the
diagnosis is determined by the combination of the different LED’s and the
current operational mode.
Explanation:
LED
Description
off
LED turned off
on
LED is permanently on
blinks
LED blink
The following operating modes are available depending on the position of
the address selector:
• DeviceNet-Mode (address selector in position 0...63)
• Configuration-Mode (address selector in position 90...92)
DeviceNet-Mode
POWER ON without DeviceNet
LED
4-20
Description
PW on
After POWER ON the LED PW is turned on and
ER off
indicates a properly operating power supply. The LED
RD blinks
RD blinks since the configuration data stored in the
BA off
EEPROM was transferred successfully into the peripheral modules
PW on
After POWER ON the LED PW is turned on. The LED
ER on
ER is on due to errors on the back panel bus or when
RD off
the configuration data could not be transferred into the
BA off
peripheral modules
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
4
POWER ON with DeviceNet without Master
LED
Descriptio
PW on
ER off
RD blinks
BA blinks
After POWER ON the LED PW is turned on.
The LED RD blinks because:
• the back panel bus is operating properly
• the configuration data was transferred successfully from the EEPROM
into the configurable peripheral modules.
The LED BA blinks because:
• at least one additional device is active on the DeviceNet,
• and the address set up on the coupler is unique.
PW on
ER on
RD off
BA off
After POWER ON the LED PW is turned on. The LED ER is on due to
one of the following conditions on the DeviceNet-coupler
• bad address or address occupied by another device
• data transfer rate is bad.
PW on
ER on
RD blinks
BA blinks
After POWER ON the LED PW is on.
The LED ER is turned on when the configuration data could not be
transferred into the configurable peripheral module.
The LED RD blinks because
• the back panel bus is operating properly
• the configuration data was not transferred into the configurable
peripheral modules.
The LED BA blinks because
• at least one other device is active on the DeviceNet,
• the address set up on the coupler is unique
POWER ON mit DeviceNet und Master
LED
PW on
ER on
RD blinks
BA on
Description
After POWER ON the LED PW is on.
The LED ER is turned on since the configuration data was not
transferred into the configurable peripheral modules.
The LED RD blinks because
• the back panel bus operates properly
• the configuration data was not transferred into the configurable
peripheral modules.
The LED BA is turned on because the coupler has IM 253 DN
established a DeviceNet-connection to a master.
Note!
The IM 253 DN coupler will execute a reset after 30s. An error that
occurs during POWER ON with DeviceNet and master displays the same
combination of LED’s as a hardware error.
It is possible to distinguish between these:
• by interruption of the DeviceNet-connection
à LED ER and RD blink!
• with a network WHO in the DeviceNet-Manager
à in case of a hardware-error the IM253DN will not appear on the
network
Please call the Advantech-hotline when a hardware error has occurred!
Chapter 4 DeviceNet
4-21
DeviceNet
Proper operation with DeviceNet and Master
LED
PW on
ER off
RD on
BA on
Description
After POWER ON the LED PW is on. The LED RD and Master is turned
on because the connection to the peripheral modules could be
established via the back panel bus.
The LED BA is turned on because the coupler IM253DN has established
a DeviceNet-connection with a master.
Error during the operation with DeviceNet and Master
LED
PW on
ER on
RD off
BA on
Description
After POWER ON the LED PW is on.
The LED ER is turned on because an error was detected on the back
panel bus.
The LED BA is turned on because the IM 253 DN coupler has
established a DeviceNet-connection with a master.
Note!
The IM 253 DN coupler will execute a reset after 30s.
Change of state from operational to module error status
LED
PW on
ER on
RD off
BA off
Description
The LED ER is turned on for 1second because a module error was
detected. Subsequently the coupler IM 253 DN will execute a reset. After
the reset the coupler is re-started and it indicates the error by means of
the respective LED-combination.
Indicators after a re-start and a reset
LED
4-22
Description
PW on
ER on
RD blinks
BA on
The LED ER is turned on permanently and the LED RD blinks because
the quantity of I/O-data was changed by the failure of the module. The
configuration data could not be transferred.
All Allen - Bradley scanners will display message #77.
PW on
ER off
RD on
BA on
The LED ER is not turned on and the LED RD ispermanently on
because the quantity of I/O-data was modified by the failure of the
module. The connection with the I/O-modules was established.
All Allen - Bradley scanners will display message #77.
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
4
Change of state from operational to connection error status
LED
PW on
ER blinks
RD blinks
BA on
Description
The LED ER blinks because the timer of the I/O-connection has detected
an error. The LED RD blinks because the I/O-connection does not exist
any longer. All inputs and outputs are set to null.
The LED BA is turned on because the connection with the master is still
established.
Configuration mode
POWER ON in configuration mode
LED
PW on
ER off
RD on
BA off
Description
After POWER ON the LED PW is turned on and indicates that the power
supply operates properly. The LED RD is turned on after a short delay
since the Baudrate was transferred into the EEPROM.
Device error
LED
Description
PW on
ER on
RD off
BA off
The address that was set up on the coupler is bad. Change the address
to a valid setting:
• 0...63 as node-address
• 90...92 for the definition of the Baudrate
PW on
ER on
RD on
BA on
When the coupler is not connected to the DeviceNet an error was
detected in the internal EEPROM or in RAM. When a DeviceNet
connection exists it is also possible that an error has occurred during the
transfer of the configuration data into the peripheral modules.
Note!
Errors that occur during POWER ON with DeviceNet and master display
the same combination of LED’s as a hardware error.
It is possible to distinguish between these:
• by interruption of the DeviceNet-connection à LED ER and RD blink!
• with a network WHO in the DeviceNet-Manager à in case of a
hardware-error the IM253DN will not appear on the network
Please call the VIPA-hotline when a hardware error has occurred!
Chapter 4 DeviceNet
4-23
DeviceNet
Profibus interface
Description
The modular ADAM-8000 can be used very easily to establish a DeviceNet
/ Profibus-Bridge. The Profibus-Master is simply installed together with the
DeviceNet-coupler on the back panel bus.
The connection from the DeviceNet to Profibus DP can transfer 256 bytes
of input and 256 bytes of output data.
In canses where the maximum quantity of data is not used is also possible
to install peripheral modules in addition to the Profibus-master.
[1] DeviceNet-coupler IM 253 DN
[2] Profibus-Master IM 208 DP(0)
[3] Additional peripheral modules
Example
You want to provide a link between DeviceNet and Profibus DP. The
following 4 modules were installed into the back panel bus:
Location
(hex)
Installed module
I/O-data and
addresses
Slot 0
DeviceNet-coupler IM 253 DN
-
Slot 1
Profibus-Master IM 208 DP
Input as of address 0
Output as of address 2
Slot 2
Digital Out SM 222
1 byte, address 0
Slot 3
Digital Out SM 222
1 byte, address
Procedure
• Assemble your system by installing the Profibus-Master IM 208 DP to
the right of the DeviceNet-coupler, followed by the 2 output modules
(see figure).
• Please ensure that the addresses of the directly installed peripheral
modules have been reserved in your Profibus configuration tool. For
details refer to the documentation on your Profibus-master.
The peripheral modules connected via Profibus DP and the output modules
exchange data by means of the Profibus-master. This communicates with
the DeviceNet-coupler via the back panel bus.
4-24
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
4
Technical data
DeviceNet-coupler
IM 253 DN
Electrical data
ADAM 8253-1DN00
Power supply
24 VDC ±15%, via an external power supply connected at the
front
Current consumption
Bus coupler: 50mA incl. supply to the peripheral modules: 800
mA max.
Isolation
between DeviceNet and
back panel bus
500 Vrm
Function specific data
Status indicator
by means of LED’s on the front
Physical connection to
DeviceNet
5-pin Open Style Connector
Network topology
Linear bus, spur lines up to 6 m in length
Communication medium
Screened 5-core cable
Communication rate
125, 250, 500 kBaud
Overall length of the bus
up to 500 m
Number of stations
64 max
Combination with peripheral modules
Number of modules
32 max.
Inputs
256 byte max.
Outputs
256 byte max.
Mechanical data
Dimensions (BxHxT)
25,4 x 76 x 76 mm
Weight
80
Chapter 4 DeviceNet
4-25
DeviceNet
4-26
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Count module
5
Counter module
Overview
This chapter contains information on the interfacing and configuration of
the counter module FM 250.
The operating modes and counting options are described for the counter
module FM 250, i.e. the behavior of the counter when the different input
signals are connected.
Below follows a description of:
• Counter module FM 250
• Technical data
System overview
Here follows a summary of the measurement modules that are currently
available from Advantech:
Counter module FM 250
Ordering details
5-2
Type
Order number
Description
FM 250
VIPA 250-1BA00
Counter module (2 counter 2 DO
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
5
Chapter
Counter module FM 250
Note!
The following information is only applicable to counter modules with
order no.: ADAM8250-1BA00 and a revision level 5 and higher.
The counter module accepts the signals from transducers connected to the
module and processes these pulses in accordance with the selected mode
of operation. The module has 2 channels with a data resolution of 32 bit
each.
These modules provide 24 counter modes and one 24 V output per channel
that is controlled in accordance with the selected mode.
Properties
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
two 32 bit channels
24 VDC supply voltage or via back panel bus
freely configurable 24 VDC outputs (0, 5A max.)
Counters and compare registers are loaded by means of a control byte
Standard up-down counter with a resolution of 32 bits or 16 bits
Comparison and auto-reload functions
Different modes for encoder pulses
Pulse-width measurements and frequency measurements
Chapter 5 Counter module
5-3
Counter module
Construction
Status indicator pin assignment
LED
Description
L+
LED (yellow) Supply
voltage available
O0
LED (green) Output
counter 0
O1
LED (green) Output
counter 1
F
LED (red) Error /
overload
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
ADAM8250-1BA00
Block diagram
5-4
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Assignment
Supply voltage +24 VDC
IN1 input 1 counter 0/1
IN2 input 2 counter 0/1
IN3 input 3 counter 0/1
OUT0 output counter 0/1
IN4 input 4 counter 2/3
IN5 input 5 counter 2/3
IN6 input 6 counter 2/3
OUT1 output counter 2/3
Common of supply voltage
Chapter
5
Access to the counter module
The module has 2 channels with a resolution of 32 bits each. You can use
parameters to specify the mode for each channel. The pin-assignment for
the channel is dependent upon the selected mode (see description of
modes).
10 data bytes are required for the data input and output. Data output to a
channel of a counter requires 10 bytes, for example for defaults or for
comparison values. In the latter case byte 9 (control) is used to initiate a
write operation into the required registers of the counter as every counter
word is associated with a bit in the 9th byte. The respective values are
transferred into the counter registers when they are toggled (0 1).
The 10th byte (status byte) controls the behavior of the counter during a
restart of the next higher master module. You can set the counter level to
remanent by means of a combination of bits 0 and 1; i.e. the original counter
level will not be reset when the next higher master module restarts.
The following combinations are possible:
Bit 0=1, bit 1=0 counter value is remanent during restart
Bit 0=x, bit 1=1 counter value is reset during restart (default)
You can check your settings at any time by reading byte 10 of the output
data.
Data received from module
Data sent to module
00h DE0
01h DE1
02h DE2 Zähler 0/1
03h DE3
04h DE4
05h DE5
06h DE6 Zähler 2/3
07h DE7
08h Control
09h Status
00h DA0
01h DA1
02h DA2 Zähler 0/1
03h DA3
04h DA4
05h DA5
06h DA6 Zähler 2/3
07h DA7
08h
09h Status
Configuration parameters
The configuration parameters consist of 2 bytes. You must use these bytes
to define the operating mode of each channel by means of a mode number.
This chapter contains a detailed description of the different modes towards
the end. The different combinations of the various modes are available from
the table on the next page. The procedure for the transfer of parameterbytes is available from the description for the System-200V bus coupler or
the master system.
7
0
Parameter b yte 1
7
Parameter b yte 2
bit no.
Modue (0 ... 26) counter 0
0
bit no.
Modue (0 ... 26) counter 1
Chapter 5 Counter module
5-5
Counter module
Summary of counter modes and interfacing
maybe
Mode combined
Function
IN1
IN2
IN3
Counter 0/1
RES CLK DIR
RES
A
B
RES
A
B
RES
A
B
IN4
IN5
IN6
Counter 2/3
RST CLK DIR
RST
A
B
RST
A
B
RST
A
B
Auto Com
Rel- pare
oad Load
OUT0
OUT1
=0
=0
=0
=0
=0
=0
=0
=0
no
no
no
no
=0
=0
=0
=0
0
1
3
5
yes
yes
yes
yes
32 bit counter
Encoder 1 edges
Encoder 2 edges
Encoder 4 edges
8
yes
2x16 bit counter up/up
-
CLK
CLK
-
CLK
CLK
-
-
no
no
9
10
11
yes
yes
yes
2x16 bit counter down/up
2x16 bit counter up/down
2x16 bit counterdown/down
-
CLK
CLK
CLK
CLK
CLK
CLK
-
CLK
CLK
CLK
CLK
CLK
CLK
-
-
no
no
no
no
no
no
12
13
14
15
yes
yes
yes
yes
32 bit counter up + gate
32 bit counter down + gate
32 bit counter up + gate
32 bit counter down + gate
=comp
=comp
=comp
=comp
=comp
=comp
=comp
=comp
no
no
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
16
17
18
19
no
no
no
no
Frequency measurement
Period measurement
Frequency measurement with gate-output
Period measurement with gate-output
Meas. active Meas. compl. no
Meas. active Meas. compl. no
Meas. gate
Gate
no
Meas. gate
Gate
no
yes
yes
yes
yes
Counter 1 counter 0 Counter 3 counter 2
6
yes
20
yes
21
22
yes
yes
23
24
25
26
yes
yes
yes
yes
Pulse low, 50kHz with Direction Input
Counter 0/1
RES CLK Gate
RES CLK Gate
RES CLK Gate
RES CLK Gate
Combination of counter 0 ... 3
RES CLK Start Stop
RES CLK Start Stop
RES CLK Start Stop
RES CLK Start Stop
-
-
Counter 0/1
Counter 2/3
RES Pulse DIR
RES Pulse DIR
-
-
RES Pulse DIR
-
-
RES Pulse Gate
RES Pulse Gate
-
-
Pulse low, prog. time-base with Direction
RES Pulse DIR
Input
Pulse low, up, prog. time-base with Gate RES Pulse Gate
Pulse high, up, prog. time-base with Gate RES Pulse Gate
Counter 0/1
One Shot, up, Set
One Shot, down, Set
One Shot, up, Reset
One Shot, down, Reset
Counter 2/3
RST CLK Gate
RST CLK Gate
RST CLK Gate
RST CLK Gate
RES
RES
RES
RES
CLK
CLK
CLK
CLK
Gate
Gate
Gate
Gate
Counter 2/
RES
RES
RES
RES
CLK
CLK
CLK
CLK
Gate
Gate
Gate
Gate
no
no
no
no
Due to technical advances the revision level and the functionality of the
counter module was continuously expanded. Below follows a list that
allocates the different modes to the revision level:
Mode 0-5
revision level 3
Mode 0-17
revision level 4
Mode 0-19
revision level 5
Mode 6, 20-26
revision level 6/7
5-6
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
yes
yes
yes
yes
5
Chapter
Terminology:
RES
RESET-Signal that must be LOW during the measuring process. A HIGH
level erases one or both counters, depending on the selected mode.
CLK
The clock signal from the transducer
Start or Stop
A HIGH-level starts or stops the counter. When the start level is active the
counter will start with the next CLK-pulse that corresponds to the selected
mode.
DIR
In mode 0 the level of the DIR signal determines the direction of the
counting process.
LOW level: count up
HIGH level: count down
Auto Reload
The Auto-Reload function transfers a user-defined value into the counter
when the counter reaches the number contained in the compare-register.
Compare Load
You can use the compare function to specify a comparison value for the
counter. Depending on the selected mode an output is activated or the
counter is re-started when the counter reaches this value.
Gate
Gate signal enabling the counter (mode 12 ... 15).
Measurement gate
Status indicator of the counter activity - is set to a HIGH level after the 1st
CLK signal and LOW level after the last CLK signal (mode 18 ... 19).
Pulse
The pulse-width of the introduced signal is determined by means of the
internal time base.
Fref
Reference- or clock frequency that is set permanently to 50kHz in mode 6.
The clock frequency Fref for counter mode 20, 21, 22 is programmable:
Parameter
0
1
2
3
Fref
10 MHz
1 M Hz
100 kHz
10 kHz
Chapter 5 Counter module
5-7
Counter module
Counter modes
Mode 0 32 bit counter
In mode 0 two counters (16 bit) are combined to produce a 32 bit counter.
You determine the direction by means of the DIR input (IN3 or IN6). Every
rising or falling edge of the input clock signal increments or decrements the
counter. During the counting process the RES signal must be at a LOW
level. If the RES signal is at a HIGH level the counter is cleared. When the
counter reaches zero, output OUT of the respective counter is active for a
minimum period of 100ms, even if the counter should continue counting. If
the counter stops at zero the output remains active.
Pin assignment access to counter
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
L+
IN1 (RES 0/1)
IN2 (CLK 0/1)
IN3 (DIR 0/1)
Out 0/1
DC 24V
Data from module
00h DA0
01h DA1
02h DA2 Counter 0/1
03h DA3
04h DA4
05h DA5
06h DA6 Counter 2/3
07h DA7
IN4 (RES 2/3)
Counter 0/1 (channel 1) Counter 2/3 (channel 2)
0
IN5 (CLK 2/3)
IN6 (DIR 2/3)
Control
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Out 2/3
M
Data to module
00h DE0
01h DE1
02h DE2 Counter 0/1
03h DE3
04h DE4
05h DE5
06h DE6 Counter 2/3
07h DE7
08h Control
5-8
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Chapter
5
Up-counter
In mode 0 a LOW level at the DIR input configures the counter for counting
up.
Timing diagram of the counter 0/1 example:
RES 0/1(IN1)
DIR 0/1 (IN3)
Tt0H
Tt0L
CLK0/1 (IN2)
TreH2d
Counter 0/1
xxxx xxxx
TclH2d
0000 0000
0000 0001
0000 0002
0000 0003
0000 0004
0000 0005
Down-counter
In mode 0 a HIGH level at the DIR input configures the counter for counting
down.
Timing diagram of the counter 0/1 example:
RES 0/1 (IN1)
DIR 0/1 (IN3)
Tt0 H
Tt0L
CLK0/1 (IN2)
TreH2d
Counter 0/1
xxxx xxxx
TclH2d
0000 0000
FFFF FFFF
FFFF FFFE
FFFF FFFD
FFFF FFFC
FFFF FFFB
Chapter 5 Counter module
5-9
Counter module
Mode 1 Encoder 1 edgeV
In mode 1 you can configure an encoder for one of the channels. Depending on the direction of rotation this encoder will increment or decrement the
internal counter with every falling edge. The RES input must be at a low
level during the counting process. A HIGH level clears the counter. When
the counter reaches zero, output OUT of the respective counter is active for
a minimum period of 100ms, even if the counter should continue counting. If
the counter stops at zero the output remains active.
Pin assignment access to counter
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
L+
IN1 (RES 0/1)
IN2 (A 0/1)
IN3 (B 0/1)
Out 0/1
DC 24V
Data from module
00h DA0
01h DA1
02h DA2 Counter 0/1
03h DA3
04h DA4
05h DA5
06h DA6 Counter 2/3
07h DA7
IN4 (RES 2/3)
Counter 0/1 (channel 1) Counter 2/3 (channel 2)
0
IN5 (A 2/3)
IN6 (B 2/3)
Control
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Out 2/3
M
Data to module
00h DE0
01h DE1
02h DE2 Counter 0/1
03h DE3
04h DE4
05h DE5
06h DE6 Counter 2/3
07h DE7
08h Control
5-10
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Chapter
5
Up-counter
Every falling edge of the signal at input A increments the counter if input B
is at HIGH level at this moment. Timing diagram for the counter 0/1 example:
RES 0/1 (IN1)
B 0/1 (IN3)
A 0/1 (IN2)
Counter 0/1
0000 0000
0000 0001
0000 0002
0000 0003
0000 0004
0000 0005
0000 0006
Down-counter
Every rising edge of the signal at input A decrements the internal counter if
input B is at HIGH level at this moment. Timing diagram for the counter 0/1
example:
RES 0/1 (IN1)
B 0/1 (IN3)
A 0/1 (IN2)
Counter 0/1
0000 0000
FFFF FFFF
FFFF FFFE
FFFF FFFD
FFFF FFFC
FFFF FFFB
FFFF FFFA
Chapter 5 Counter module
5-11
Counter module
Mode 3 Encoder 2 edges
Every rising or falling edge of the signal at input A changes the counter by
1. The direction of the count depends on the level of the signal applied to
input B. RES must be at a LOW level during the counting process. A HIGH
level clears the counter. When the counter reaches zero, output OUT of the
respective counter is active for a minimum period of 100ms, even if the
counter should continue counting. If the counter stops at zero the output
remains active.
Pin assignment access to counter
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
L+
IN1 (RES 0/1)
IN2 (A 0/1)
IN3 (B 0/1)
Out 0/1
DC 24V
Data from module
00h DA0
01h DA1
02h DA2 Counter 0/1
03h DA3
04h DA4
05h DA5
06h DA6 Counter 2/3
07h DA7
IN4 (RES 2/3)
Counter 0/1 (channel 1) Counter 2/3 (channel 2)
0
IN5 (A 2/3)
IN6 (B 2/3)
Control
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Out 2/3
M
Data to module
00h DE0
01h DE1
02h DE2 Counter 0/1
03h DE3
04h DE4
05h DE5
06h DE6 Counter 2/3
07h DE7
08h Control
5-12
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Chapter
5
Up-counter
The counter is incremented by the rising edge of signal A if input B is at a
LOW level or by the falling edge of input A when input B is at a HIGH level.
Timing diagram for the counter 0/1 example:
RES 0/1 (IN1)
B 0/1 (IN3)
A 0/1 (IN2)
Counter 0/1
00000000
00000001
00000002
00000003
00000004
00000005
00000006
00000007
00000008
00000009
Down-counter
The counter is decremented by the rising edge of signal A if input B is at a
HIGH level or by the falling edge of input A when input B is at a LOW level.
Timing diagram for the counter 0/1 example:
RES 0/1 (IN1)
B 0/1 (IN3)
A 0/1 (IN2)
Counter 0/1
XXXXX
00000000
FFFFFFFF
FFFFFFFE
FFFFFFFD FFFFFFFC FFFFFFFB FFFFFFFA
FFFFFFF9
FFFFFFF8
Chapter 5 Counter module
FFFFFFF7
5-13
Counter module
Mode 5 Encoder 4 edges
Every rising or falling edge at inputs A or B increments or decrements the
counter. The direction depends on the level applied to the other input (B or
A). RES must be at a LOW level during the counting process. A HIGH level
clears the counter. When the counter reaches zero, output OUT of the
respective counter is active for a minimum period of 100ms, even if the
counter should continue counting. If the counter stops at zero the output
remains active.
Pin assignment access to counter
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
5-14
Data from module
00h DA0
01h DA1
02h DA2 Counter 0/1
03h DA3
04h DA4
05h DA5
06h DA6 Counter 2/3
07h DA7
L+
IN1 (RES 0/1)
IN2 (A 0/1)
IN3 (B 0/1)
Out 0/1
Counter 0/1 (channel 1) Counter 2/3 (channel 2)
DC 24V
IN4 (RES 2/3)
0
IN5 (A 2/3)
IN6 (B 2/3)
Control
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Out 2/3
M
Data to module
00h DE0
01h DE1
02h DE2 Counter 0/1
03h DE3
04h DE4
05h DE5
06h DE6 Counter 2/3
07h DE7
08h Control
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Chapter
5
Up-counter
The counter is incremented when a rising edge is applied to B while input A
is at a HIGH level or if a falling edge is applied to B when input A is at a
LOW level. Alternatively it is also incremented when a rising edge is
applied to A when input B is at a LOW level of by a falling edge at A when
input B is at a HIGH level. Timing diagram for the counter 0/1 example:
RES 0/1 (IN1)
B 0/1 (IN 3)
A 0/1 (IN2)
Counter 0/1
00000000
Down-counter
The counter is decremented when a rising edge is applied to B while input
A is at a LOW level or if a falling edge is applied to B when input A is at a
HIGH level. Alternatively it is also decremented when a rising edge is
applied to A when input B is at a HIGH level of by a falling edge at A when
input B is at a LOW level. Timing diagram for counter 0/1 example:
RES 0/1 (IN1)
B 0/1 (IN 3)
A 0/1 (IN2)
Counter 0/1
00000000
Chapter 5 Counter module
5-15
Counter module
Mode 6 pulse-width measurements, Pulse low, 50kHz with
direction control
The pulse-width of a signal connected to the CLK input is determined by
means of an internal time base and saved. The measurement is started with
the falling edge of the input signal and it is stopped by the rising edge of
the input. This saves the value in 20s units in a buffer from where it can be
retrieved (corresponds to f ref = 50kHz).
Input DIR determines the counting direction of the counter. If DIR is at a
LOW level the counter counts up. A HIGH level lets the counter count
down.
The input RES must be at a LOW level. A HIGH at this input would clear the
counter.
With the rising edge of the signal pulse a result is transferred into the DA
area; the result remains available until it is overwritten by the next new
result.
Signals Out 0 or Out 1 are not modified.
Pin assignment access to counter
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
5-16
L+
IN1 (RES 0/1)
IN2 (PULSE 0/1)
IN3 (DIR 0/1)
Out 0
DC 24V
Data from module
00h DA0
01h DA1
02h DA2 Counter 0/1
03h DA3
04h DA4
05h DA5
06h DA6 Counter 2/3
07h DA7
Counter 0/1 (channel 1) Counter 2/3 (channel 2)
IN4 (RES 2/3)
IN5 (PULSE 2/3)
IN6 (DIR 2/3)
Out 1
M
0
Data to module
00h
01h
02h
03h DE3 Counter 0/1
04h
05h
06h
07h DE7 Counter 2/3
08h Control
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
1
f
ref
2
3
50kHz
4
5
f
ref
6
7
50kHz
Chapter
5
Up-counter
The RES-signal (R0) and the DIR-signal (D0) are reset. The measurement is
started by the falling edge at input PULSE (C0) and the counter is clocked
up by the 50kHz-clock. The rising edge of the signal at input PULSE (C0)
terminates the count operation and the result is transferred into the result
register. The result is available to the PLC. The value remains in the result
register until a new measurement has been completed which overwrites the
register.
RES
DIR
PULSE
50kHz
Counter
Result
Down-counter
The RES-signal (R0) is reset and the DIR-signal (D0) is placed at a HIGH
level. The measurement is started by the falling edge at input PULSE (C0)
and the counter is clocked down by the 50kHz-clock. The rising edge of the
signal at input PULSE (C0) terminates the count operation and the result is
transferred into the result register. The result is available to the PLC. The
value remains in the result register until a new measurement has been
completed which overwrites the register.
RST
DIR
PULSE
50kHz
Counter
Result
Chapter 5 Counter module
5-17
Counter module
Mode 8 ... 11 two-input counter function
In this mode each channel provides 2 counters of 16 bits each. The rising
edge of the input clock CLK x increments or decrements the respective
counter. In this mode each counter can also be preset to a certain value by
means of a control-bit. Outputs are not available. A RESET is also not
available. The following combinations are possible for every channel:
Mode 8 - counter 0/2 up, counter 1/3 up
Mode 9 - counter 0/2 down, counter 1/3 up
Mode 10 - counter 0/2 up, counter 1/3 down
Mode 11 - counter 0/2 down, counter 1/3 down
Pin assignment access to counter
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
L+
n.c.
IN2 (CLK 1)
IN3 (CLK 0)
n.c.
DC 24V
Data from module
00h DA0
Counter 1
01h DA1
02h DA2
Counter 0
03h DA3
04h DA4
Counter 3
05h DA5
06h DA6
Counter 2
07h DA7
CLK 1
CLK 0
CLK 3
CLK 2
n.c.
Channel 1
IN5 (CLK 3)
Counter 1
01
IN6 (CLK 2)
Channel 2
Counter 0
23
Counter 3
45
n.c.
M
Control
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Data to module
00h DE0
Counter 1
01h DE1
02h DE2
Counter 0
03h DE3
04h DE4
Counter 3
05h DE5
06h DE6 Counter 2
07h DE7
08h Control
Timing diagram
Below follows a timing diagram depicting an example of counter 0 and
counter 1 in mode 8:
CLK 0 (IN3)
Counter 0
CLK 1 (IN2)
Counter 1
5-18
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Counter 2
67
Chapter
5
Mode 12 and 13 32 bit counter with gate
In mode 12 and mode 13 you can implement a 32 bit counter that is controlled by a gating signal (Gate). The direction of counting depends on the
selected mode. Every rising edge of the input signal increments or decrements the counter provided that the Gate signal is at HIGH level. RES must
be LOW during the counting process. A HIGH level clears the counter.
When the counter reaches the value that was previously loaded into the
compare register, output OUT is set active for a minimum period of 100 ms
while the counter continues counting.
Mode 12 - 32 Bit counter up + gate with compare
Mode 13 - 32 Bit counter down + gate with compare
Pin assignment access to counter
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Counter 0/1 (chan nel 1)
L+
Data from module
00h DA0
01h DA1
02h DA2 Counter 0/1
03h DA3
04h DA4
05h DA5
06h DA6 Counter 2/3
07h DA7
IN1 (RES 0/1)
IN2 (CLK 0/1)
IN3 (Gate 0/1)
Out 0
DC 24V
IN4 (RES 2/3)
Control
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Compare 0/1 (channel 1)
0
1
2
3
Comparison
1
Counter 0/1 (channel 1)
0
1
2
3
Data to module
00h DE0
01h DE1 Counter 0/1 /
02h DE2 Compare 0/1
03h DE3
04h DE4
05h DE5
06h DE6
07h DE7
08h Control
IN5 (CLK 2/3)
IN6 (Gate 2/3)
Out 1
M
Counter 2/3 (chan nel 2)
Data to module
00h DE0
01h DE1
02h DE2
03h DE3
04h DE4
05h DE5 Counter 2/3 /
06h DE6 Compare 2/3
07h DE7
08h Control
Control
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Comparison
Data from module
00h DE0
01h DE1
02h DE2 Counter 0/1
03h DE3
04h DE4
05h DE5
06h DE6 Counter 2/3
07h DE7
Compare 2/3 (channel 2)
4
5
6
7
Counter 2/3 (channel 2)
4
5
6
7
Timing diagram
Below follows an example of a timing diagram of Counter 0/1 mode 12:
RES 0/1 (IN 1)
Gate 0/1 (IN 3)
Tt0H
Tt0L
CLK 0/1 (IN 2)
TreH2d
Counter 0/1
xxxx xxx
TclH2d
0000 0000
0000 0001
0000 0002
0000 0003
Chapter 5 Counter module
5-19
Counter module
5-20
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
5
Mode 14 and 15 32 bit counter with gate and Auto Reload
Modes 14 and 15 operate in the same manner as mode 12 and 13 with the
addition of an Auto-Reload function. The “Auto Reload” is used to define a
value in the load-register that is used to pre-set the counter automatically
when it reaches the compare value.
A HIGH pulse applied to RES clears the counter to 0000 0000. A HIGH level
applied to GATE enables the counter so that is incremented/decremented by
every rising edge of the CLK signal. As long as Gate is HIGH the counter
will count every rising edge of the signal applied to CLK until the count is
one less than the value entered into Compare. The next pulse overwrites the
counter with the value contained in the Load register. This process continues until GATE is set to a LOW level.
When an Auto Reload occurs the status of the respective output changes.
The RES signal only resets the counter and not the output signals.
Mode 14 - 32 bit counter up + gate with compare and Auto-Reload
Mode 15 - 32 bit counter down + gate with compare and Auto-Reload
Pin assignment access to counter
Chapter 5 Counter module
5-21
Counter module
Example
This example is intended to explain the operation of the counters in mode 14
and 15.
A HIGH pulse applied to RES clears the counter to 0000 0000. A HIGH level
applied to GATE enables the counter. As long as Gate is HIGH the counter
will count every rising edge of the signal applied to CLK until the count is
one less than the value entered into Compare. In this example the counter
counts to 0000 0004 followed immediately by an “Auto Reload”, i.e. the
counter is pre-set to the contents of the Load register (in this case 0000
0002). The level of output OUT 0 changes every time an Auto Reload is
executed.
In this example the counter counts from 0000 0002 to 0000 0004 as long as
the GATE input is at a HIGH level.
Every Load operation changes the status of output OUT 0.
RES 0/1 (IN 1)
Gate 0/1 (IN 3)
CLK 0/1 (IN 2)
Counter 0/1
Out 0
5-22
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
5
Mode 16 frequency measurement
In this mode it is possible to determine the frequency of the signal that is
applied to the CLK input. Counter 0/1 is provided with a reference signal by
means of DE7 and a gate time that is controlled indirectly by the value n to
determine the duration for which counter 2/3 is enabled. The value of n can
range from 1 to 232 -1 and it is loaded into the Compare register.
When enabled by the rising edge of the signal applied to Start, counter 0/1
counts reference pulses of the reference clock generator from the first rising
edge of the CLK signal.
During this time counter 2/3 counts every rising edge of the CLK signal.
Both counters are stopped when counter 0/1 reaches the Compare value or
when a HIGH level is applied to Stop. You can calculate the frequency by
means of the formula shown below.
This mode can not be combined with other modes!
Pin assignment access to counter
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
L+
Data
00h
01h
02h
03h
04h
05h
06h
07h
IN1 (RES)
IN2 (CLK)
IN3 (Start)
Out 0
from module
DA0
DA1
DA2
DA3
DA4
DA5
DA6
DA7
Counter 0/1
Counter 2/3
DC 24V
IN4 (Stop)
Compare (quantity)
0
1
2
3
n.c.
comparison
Counter 0/1
0
1
2
n.c.
3
Counter 2/3
0
1
2
3
Gate-time
Out 1
M
Control
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Data to module
00h DE0
01h DE1
Compare
02h DE2
03h DE3
04h DE4
05h DE5
06h DE6
07h DE7 Parameter
08h Control Reference frequency
0 : 10 MHz
1 : 1 MHz
2 : 100 kHz
3 : 10 kHz
fref
CLK
Chapter 5 Counter module
5-23
Counter module
Frequency calculation
When the measurement has been completed you can calculate the frequency as follows:
fr • m
Frequency=
n
where fr : reference frequency (is supplied via DE7 by means of control-bit 7)
m : counter 2/3 contents (number of CLK pulses)
n : number of reference frequency pulses in counter 0/1 (equal to Compare,
if the operation was not terminated prematurely by means of Stop)
Timing diagram
RES (IN1)
Start (IN3)
Stop (IN4)
CLK (IN2)
Counter 2/3 xxx
0
Counter 0/1 xxx
0
m
123
n
Out0 (meas. active)
Out1 (end ofmeas.)
Example
Quantity = 1000 000 pulses
Reference frequency = 1 MHz
Data to module
DE0 40h
DE1 42h
DE2 0Fh Compare
DE3 00h
DE4 DE4
DE5 DE5
DE6 DE6
DE7 01h Parameter
DE8 Control
Control
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
Compare
00h 0Fh 42h 40h
Anzahl = 1000 000
fref
Reference
frequency 1 MHz
Using a frequency of 1 MHz and 1000 000 pulses will return 1 Hz, i.e. when
the measurement is completed counter 2/3 contains the frequency directly no conversion is required.
Note!
Counter 2/3 will indicate the exact frequency if you choose fr and n so that
the formula returns 1 Hz precisely.
5-24
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
5
Mode 17 period measurement
This mode is used to determine the average period of n measuring intervals
of a signal that is connected to the CLK input. For this purpose you supply
a reference clock to counter 2/3 by means of DE7 and indirectly a gate time
defined by the value of n for which counter 2/3 is enabled. The value of n
can range from 1 to 232 -1 and it is loaded into the Compare register.
The measurement period begins when a rising edge is applied to Start.
During this period counter 2/3 counts reference pulses from the reference
clock generator starting with the first rising edge of the CLK signal. In the
mean time counter 0/1 counts every rising edge of the CLK signal. Both
counters are stopped when the count in counter 0/1 reaches the Compare
value or when Stop is set to a HIGH level. You can then calculate the
average period by means of the formula shown below.
This mode can not be combined with other modes!
Pin assignment access to counter
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Data from module
00h DA0
01h DA1
02h DA2 Counter 0/1
03h DA3
04h DA4
05h DA5
06h DA6 Counter 2/3
L+
IN1 (RES)
IN2 (CLK)
IN3 (Start)
07h
DA7
Out 0
DC 24V
IN4 (Stop)
Compare (Anzahl)
0
1
2
3
Counter 0/1
0
1
2
comparison
3
Counter 2/3
0
1
2
3
n.c.
n.c.
Out 1
M
Control
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Data to module
00h DE0
01h DE1
Compare
02h DE2
03h DE3
04h DE4
05h DE5
06h DE6
07h DE7 Parameter
08h Control Reference frequency
0 : 10 MHz
1 : 1 MHz
2 : 100 kHz
3 : 10 kHz
CLK
Gate-time
Chapter 5 Counter module
fref
5-25
Counter module
Period calculation
When the measurement has been completed you can calculate the period as
follows:
fr • m
Frequency=
n
where fr: reference frequency (supplied in DE7 with control bit 7)
m: contents of counter 2/3 (counts reference clock pulses)
n: number of CLK-pulses in counter 0/1 (corresponds to Compare,
provided it was not terminated prematurely by Stop)
Timing diagram:
IN1 (RES)
IN3 (Start)
IN4 (Stop)
IN2 (CLK)
Counter 0/1 xxx
0
Counter 2/3 xxx
0
Out0 (meas. active)
Out1 (end of meas.)
5-26
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
123
n
m
Chapter
5
Mode 18 frequency measurement with gate output
The operation of mode 18 is similar to mode 16. The only difference is the
manner in which OUT 0 and OUT 1 are controlled. In this case OUT 0 is
only activated when the counting operation starts and it is deactivated
when counting ends, i.e. OUT 0 provides an indication of the internal gate.
OUT 1 provides the inverted status of the gate.
This mode can not be combined with other modes!
Pin assignment access to counter
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Data from module
00h DA0
01h DA1
02h DA2 Counter 0/1
03h DA3
04h DA4
05h DA5
06h DA6 Counter 2/3
07h DA7
L+
IN1 (RES)
IN2 (CLK)
IN3 (Start)
Out 0
DC 24V
IN4 (Stop)
Compare (Anzahl)
0
1
2
3
Counter 0/1
0
1
2
comparison
3
Counter 2/3
0
1
2
3
n.c.
n.c.
Out 1
M
Control
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Data to module
00h DE0
01h DE1
Compare
02h DE2
03h DE3
04h DE4
05h DE5
06h DE6
07h DE7 Parameter
08h Control Reference frequency
0 : 10 MHz
1 : 1 MHz
2 : 100 kHz
3 : 10 kHz
CLK
Gate-time
fref
Frequency calculation
When the measurement has been completed you can calculate the frequency as follows:
fr • m
Frequency=
n
where fr: Reference frequency (supplied in DE7 with control bit 7)
m: contents of counter 2/3 (CLK pulse count)
n: number of pulses of the reference frequency in counter 0/1 (corresponds
to Compare provided it was not terminated prematurely by Stop)
Note!
Counter 2/3 will indicate the exact frequency if you choose fr and n so that
the formula returns 1 Hz precisely.
For example when the applied frequency is 1 MHz and the number of
pulses is 1000 000 the result will be 1 Hz, i.e. counter 2/3 contains the
precise frequency after the measurement - this does not require further
conversion.
Chapter 5 Counter module
5-27
Counter module
Timing diagram:
IN1 (RES)
IN3 (Start)
IN4 (Stop)
IN2 (CLK)
Counter 2/3 xxx
0
Counter 0/1 xxx
0
123
m
n
Out0 (Gate open)
Out1 (Gate closed)
Example
Pulse count = 1000 000
Reference frequency = 1 MHz
Data to module
DE0 40h
DE1 42h
DE2 0Fh Compare
DE3 00h
DE4 DE4
DE5 DE5
DE6 DE6
DE7 01h Parameter
DE8 Control
Control
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
Compare
00h 0Fh 42h 40h
Anzahl = 1000 000
fref
Reference
frequency 1 MHz
5-28
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
5
Mode 19 period measurement with gate output
The operation of mode 19 is identical to mode 17. The only difference is the
manner in which OUT 0 and OUT 1 are controlled. Other than for mode 17,
OUT 0 is only activated when the counting operation starts and it is
deactivated when counting ends, i.e. OUT 0 provides an indication of the
internal gate. OUT 1 provides the inverted status of the gate.
This mode can not be combined with other modes!
Pin assignment access to counter
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
L+
Data from module
00h DA0
01h DA1
02h DA2 Counter 0/1
03h DA3
04h DA4
05h DA5
06h DA6 Counter 2/3
IN1 (R ES)
IN2 (CLK)
IN 3 (S tart)
Out 0
IN4 (S top)
07h
DC 24V
Compare (Anz ahl)
0
1
2
3
n.c.
n.c.
Out 1
M
DA7
Control
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Data to module
00h DE0
01h DE1
Compare
02h DE2
03h DE3
04h DE4
05h DE5
06h DE6
07h DE7 Pa rameter
08h Control R eference frequency
0 : 10 MHz
1 : 1 MH z
2 : 100 kHz
3 : 10 kHz
Counter 0/1
0
1
2
comparis on
CLK
3
Counter 2/3
0
1
2
Gate-time
3
fref
Period calculation
When the measurement has been completed you can calculate the mean
period as follows:
fr • m
Frequency=
n
where fr: Reference frequency (supplied in DE7 with control bit 7)
m: contents of counter 2/3 (reference clock pulse count)
n: number of CLK pulses in counter 0/1 (corresponds to compare,
provided it was not terminated prematurely by Stop)
Chapter 5 Counter module
5-29
Counter module
Timing diagram:
5-30
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
5
Mode 20 pulse measurements, pulse down
prog. time-base, with direction control
The pulse-width of a signal that is applied to the PULSE input is determined
by means of an internal time-base. The measurement is started by the falling
edge of the input signal and ends with the rising edge.
The rising edge of the measured signal stores the resulting pulse-width in
units of 1/Fref.
Input DIR controls the direction of the count. When DIR is held at a LOW
level the counter counts UP. When DIR is at a HIGH level the counter
counts DOWN.
RES must be held at LOW during the counting operation. A HIGH level
clears the counter.
Fref is programmable.
The OUT signal is not changed.
Pin assignment access to counter
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
L+
IN1 (RES 0/1)
IN2 (PULSE 0/1)
IN3 (DIR 0/1)
Out 0
DC 24V
Data from module
00h DA0
01h DA1
02h DA2 Counter 0/1
03h DA3
04h DA4
05h DA5
06h DA6 Counter 2/3
07h DA7
Counter 0/1 (channe 1) Counter 2/3 (channel 2)
IN4 (RES 2/3)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
IN5 (PULSE 2/3)
IN6 (DIR 2/3)
Control
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Out 1
M
Data to module
00h
01h
02h
03h DE3 Counter 0/1
04h
05h
06h
07h DE7 Counter 2/3
08h Control
f
ref
f
ref
Chapter 5 Counter module
5-31
Counter module
Up-counter
The RES-signal (R0) and the DIR-signal (D0) are set to low. Subsequently
the measurement is started with the falling edge of PULSE (C0) and the
counter counts up in accordance with the selected time-base. A rising edge
at PULSE (C0) terminates the counting operation and the accumulated
count is transferred into the result register. The result register is available to
the PLC. The value remains in the result register until a new measurement
has been completed and the register is changed by the new result.
RES
DI R
PU L S E
1/f r ef
Counter
7
7
Re s ult
Down-counter
The RES-signal (R0) is set to low and the DIR-signal (D0) to high. Subsequently the measurement is started with the falling edge of PULSE (C0) and
the counter counts down in accordance with the selected time-base. A
rising edge at PULSE (C0) terminates the counting operation and the
accumulated count is transferred into the result register. The result register
is available to the PLC. The value remains in the result register until a new
measurement has been completed and the register is changed by the new
result.
PU LS E
1/f r ef
Counter
Re s ult
5-32
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
F9
00
Chapter
5
Mode 21 pulse-width measurement, pulse low
Direction up, prog. time-base, with enable
The pulse-width of a signal applied to the PULSE-input is determined by
means of a programmable time base (f ref). The measurement starts with the
falling edge of the input signal and it is stopped by the rising edge of the
input signal. The rising edge of the input signal saves the resulting pulsewidth in units of 1/f ref. This is available to other devices.
A condition for the function is that a HIGH level is applied to the GATE
input.
Input RES must be at a LOW level. A HIGH level at this input would clear
the counter.
The OUT signal is not modified.
Pin assignment access to counter
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Data from module
00h DA0
01h DA1
02h DA2 Counter 0/1
03h DA3
04h DA4
05h DA5
06h DA6 Counter 2/3
L+
IN1 (R E S 0/1)
IN2 (P U L S E 0/1)
IN3 (GAT E 0/1)
Out 0
IN4 (R E S 2/3)
07h
DA7
Counter 0/1 (channe 1) Counter 2/3 (channel 2)
DC 24V
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
IN5 (P U L S E 2/3)
IN6 (GAT E 2/3)
Out 1
M
Data to module
00h
01h
02h
03h DE 3 Counter 0/1
04h
05h
06h
07h DE 7 Counter 2/3
08h Control
Control
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
f
ref
f
ref
Chapter 5 Counter module
5-33
Counter module
Up-counter
A low level is applied to the RES (R0). The measurement can only be started
when the GATE-signal is at a HIGH level. The measurement is started with
the falling edge of PULSE (C0) and the counter counts up in accordance
with the selected time-base. A rising edge at PULSE (C0) terminates the
counting operation and the accumulated count is transferred into the result
register. The result register is available to the PLC. The value remains in the
result register until a new measurement has been completed and the register
is changed by the new result. The GATE signal must be held at a HIGH level
for the entire cycle, since the measurement could otherwise not be completed.
5-34
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
5
Mode 22 pulse-width measurement, pulse high
Direction down, prog. Time base, with enable
The pulse-width of a signal applied to the PULSE-input is determined by
means of a programmable time base (f ref). The rising edge of the input
signal saves the resulting pulse-width in units of 1/f ref. This is available to
other devices.
A condition for the function is that a HIGH level is applied to the GATE
input.
Input RES must be at a LOW level. A HIGH level at this input would clear
the counter.
The OUT signal is not modified.
Pin assignment access to counter
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Data from module
00h DA0
01h DA1
02h DA2 Counter 0/1
03h DA3
04h DA4
05h DA5
06h DA6 Counter 2/3
L+
IN1 (R E S 0/1)
IN2 (P U L S E 0/1)
IN3 (GAT E 0/1)
Out 0
IN4 (R E S 2/3)
07h
DA7
0
IN5 (P U L S E 2/3)
IN6 (GAT E 2/3)
Out 1
M
Counter 0/1 (channe 1) Counter 2/3 (channel 2)
DC 24V
Data to module
00h
01h
02h
03h DE 3 Counter 0/1
04h
05h
06h
07h DE 7 Counter 2/3
08h Contr ol
Control
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1
2
f
3
4
ref
Chapter 5 Counter module
5
f
6
7
ref
5-35
Counter module
Down-counter
The RES-signal (R0) is set to low. The measurement can only be started
when the GATE signal is at a HIGH level. The measurement is started with
the rising edge of PULSE (C0) and the counter counts down in accordance
with the selected time-base. A falling edge at PULSE (C0) terminates the
counting operation and the accumulated count is transferred into the result
register. The result register is available to the PLC. The value remains in the
result register until a new measurement has been completed and the register
is changed by the new result. A condition for the function is that a HIGH
level is applied to the GATE input.
5-36
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
5
Mode 23 One Shot, direction of count is up, with gate, output
signal
In mode 23 you can implement one 32 bit counter per channel, each one
controlled by the signal applied to the gate input. Every rising edge of the
input clock increments the counter as long as the signal applied to GATE is
HIGH. RES must be at a LOW level. A HIGH level at this input would clear
the counter. OUT changes to HIGH when the counter is loaded. OUT is
cleared when the value entered into COMPARE is reached. The counter will
continue the count operation after the value in COMPARE was reached.
Mode 23 - One Shot, up with Gate-Input, Output set
Pin assignment access to counter
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
L+
Counter 0/1 (channel 1)
Data from module
00h DA0
01h DA1
02h DA2 Counter 0/1
03h DA3
04h DA4
05h DA5
06h DA6 Counter 2/3
IN1 (R E S 0/1)
IN2 (CL K 0/1)
IN 3 (GAT E 0/1)
Out 0
IN4 (R E S 2/3)
IN5 (CL K 2/3)
IN 6 (GAT E 2/3)
Out 1
M
DC 24V
07h
DA7
Data to module
00h DE0
01h DE1
Counter 0/1 /
02h DE2
Compare 0/1
03h DE3
04h DE4
05h DE5
06h DE6
07h DE7
08h Contr ol
Control
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Compare 0/1 (channel1)
0
1
2
3
Comparison
2
Counter 0/1 (channel 1)
0
1
2
3
Counter 2/3 (channel 2)
Data from module
00h DE0
01h DE1
Counter 0/1
02h DE2
03h DE3
04h DE4
05h DE5
Counter 2/3
06h DE6
07h
DE7
Data to module
00h DE0
01h DE1
02h DE2
03h DE3
04h DE4
05h DE5
Counter 2/3 /
06h DE6
Compare 2/3
07h DE7
08h Contr ol
Control
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Comparison
1
Compare 2/3 (channel2)
4
5
6
7
Counter 2/3 (channel 2)
4
5
6
7
Chapter 5 Counter module
5-37
Counter module
Timing diagram
Example of counter 0/1 in mode 23:
xxxx xxxx
0000 0004
0000 0005
0000 0006
0000 0007
1. The RES signal changes to LOW.
2. Compare is loaded once.
3. Counter (subject to Control) is loaded with, e.g. 0004.
4. The GATE signal is active.
Stop by means of Control = termination
5-38
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
0000 0008
Chapter
5
Mode 24 One Shot, direction down, with gate, output signal
In mode 24 you can implement one 32 bit counter per channel, each one
controlled by the signal applied to the gate input. Every rising edge of the
input clock decrements the counter as long as the signal applied to GATE is
HIGH. RES must be at a LOW level. A HIGH level at this input would clear
the counter. OUT changes to HIGH when the counter is loaded. OUT is
cleared when the value entered into COMPARE is reached. The counter will
continue the count operation after the value in COMPARE was reached.
Mode 24 - One Shot, down with Gate-Input, Output set
Pin assignment access to counter
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
L+
Counter 0/1 (channel 1)
Data from module
00h DA 0
01h DA 1
02h DA 2 Counter 0/1
03h DA 3
04h DA 4
05h DA 5
06h DA 6 Counter 2/3
IN1 (R E S 0/1)
IN2 (CL K 0/1)
IN3 (Gate 0/1)
Out 0
IN4 (R E S 2/3)
IN5 (CL K 2/3)
IN6 (Gate 2/3)
Out 1
M
DC 24V
07h
DA 7
Data to module
00h DE 0
01h DE 1 Counter 0/1 /
02h DE 2 Compare 0/1
03h DE 3
04h DE 4
05h DE 5
06h DE 6
07h DE 7
08h Control
Control
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Compare 0/1 (channel 1)
0
1
2
3
Comparison
2
Counter 0/1 (channel 1)
0
1
2
3
Counter 2/3 (channel 2)
Data from module
00h DE 0
01h DE 1
02h DE 2 Counter 0/1
03h DE 3
04h DE 4
05h DE 5
06h DE 6 Counter 2/3
07h
DE 7
Data to module
00h DE 0
01h DE 1
02h DE 2
03h DE 3
04h DE 4
05h DE 5 Counter 2/3 /
06h DE 6 Compare 2/3
07h DE 7
08h Control
Control
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Comparison
1
Compare 2/3 (channel 2)
4
5
6
7
Counter 2/3 (channel 2)
4
5
6
7
Chapter 5 Counter module
5-39
Counter module
Timing diagram
Example of counter 0/1 in mode 24:
1. The RES signal changes to LOW.
2. Compare is loaded once.
3. Counter (subject to Control) is loaded with, e.g. 0009.
4. The GATE signal is active.
Stop by means of Control = termination
5-40
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
5
Mode 25 One Shot, direction of count is up, with reset signal
In mode 25 you can implement one 32 bit counter per channel, each one
controlled by the signal applied to the gate input. Every rising edge of the
input clock increments the counter as long as the signal applied to GATE is
HIGH. RES must be at a LOW level. A HIGH level at this input would clear
the counter. OUT (active 0) changes to LOW when the counter is loaded.
OUT becomes HIGH when the value entered into COMPARE is reached.
Mode 25 One Shot, up, Reset
Pin assignment access to counter
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Counter 0/1 (channel 1)
L+
IN1 (RES 0/1)
IN2 (CLK 0/1)
IN3 (Gate 0/1)
Out 0
DC 24V
Data from module
00h DA0
01h DA1
02h DA2 Counter 0/1
03h DA3
04h DA4
05h DA5
06h DA6 Counter 2/3
07h DA7
IN4 (RES 2/3)
IN5 (CLK 2/3)
IN6 (Gate 2/3)
Out 1
M
Compare 0/1 (channel 1)
0
1
2
3
Control
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Comparison
2
Counter 0/1 (channel 1)
0
1
2
3
Data to module
00h DE0
01h DE1 Counter 0/1 /
02h DE2 Compare 0/1
03h DE3
04h DE4
05h DE5
06h DE6
07h DE7
08h Control
Counter 2/3 (channel 2)
Data from module
00h DE0
01h DE1
02h DE2 Counter 0/1
03h DE3
04h DE4
05h DE5
06h DE6 Counter 2/3
07h DE7
Data to module
00h DE0
01h DE1
02h DE2
03h DE3
04h DE4
05h DE5 Counter 2/3 /
06h DE6 Compare 2/3
07h DE7
08h Control
Compare 2/3 (channel 2)
4
5
6
7
Control
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Comparison
1
Counter 2/3 (channel 2)
4
5
6
7
Chapter 5 Counter module
5-41
Counter module
Timing diagram
Example of counter 0/1 in mode 25:
5-42
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
5
Mode 26 One Shot, direction of count is down, with reset signal
In mode 26 you can implement one 32 bit counter per channel, each one
controlled by the signal applied to the gate input. Every rising edge of the
input clock decrements the counter as long as the signal applied to GATE is
HIGH. RES must be at a LOW level. A HIGH level at this input would clear
the counter. OUT (active 0) changes to LOW when the counter is loaded.
OUT becomes HIGH when the value entered into COMPARE is reached.
Mode 26 One Shot, down, Reset
Pin assignment access to counter
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
L+
Counter 0/ 1 (channe l 1)
IN1 (RES 0/1)
IN2 (CLK 0/1)
IN3 (Gate 0/1)
Out 0
DC 24V
Data
00h
01h
02h
03h
04h
05h
06h
07h
from module
DA0
DA1
DA2
DA3
DA4
DA5
DA6
DA7
Counter 0/1
Counter 2/3
Control
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
IN4 (RES 2/3)
IN5 (CLK 2/3)
IN6 (Gate 2/3)
Out 1
M
Compare 0/1 (channel 1)
0
1
2
3
Comparison
2
Counter 0/1 (channel 1)
0
1
2
3
Data to module
00h DE0
01h DE1 Counter 0/1 /
02h DE2 Compare 0/1
03h DE3
04h DE4
05h DE5
06h DE6
07h DE7
08h Control
Counter 2/ 3 (channe l 2)
Data
00h
01h
02h
03h
04h
05h
06h
07h
from module
DE0
DE1
DE2
DE3
DE4
DE5
DE6
DE7
Counter 0/1
Counter 2/3
Data to module
00h DE0
01h DE1
02h DE2
03h DE3
04h DE4
05h DE5 Counter 2/3 /
06h DE6 Compare 2/3
07h DE7
08h Control
Control
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Comparison
1
Compare 2/3 (channel 2)
4
5
6
7
Counter 2/3 (channel 2)
4
5
6
7
Chapter 5 Counter module
5-43
Counter module
Timing diagram
Example of counter 0/1 in mode 26:
5-44
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
5
Counter module
FM 250
Electrical data
Advantech 250-1BA0
Number of counters
2 or 4
Counter resolution
32 Bit or 16 Bit
Number of operating modes
26
Counter frequency
1 MHz max.
Current consumption
80 mA via back panel bus
Isolation
yes
Output stage
24 VDC high side switch 0, 5 A
Ext. power supply
24 VDC (18 ... 28, 8 V)
Status indicator
via LED’s located on the front
Programming specifications
Input data
10 Bytes
Output data
9 Bytes
Parameter data
2 Bytes
Diagnostic data
-
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (WxHxD)
25,4 x 76 x 76 mm
Weight
100 g
Chapter 5 Counter module
5-45
Counter module
5-46
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Power supplies
6
Power supplies
Overview
This chapter contains descriptions of the ADAM-8000 power supplies.
Below follows a description of the:
• Power supply 2 A
• Power supply 4 A
• Installation and wiring
• Technical data
Ordering details
6-2
Order number
Description
ADAM 8207-1BA00
Power supply primary AC 100...240 V, secondary DC24 V, 2 A, 48 W
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
6
Safety precautions
Appropriate use
The power supplies were designed and constructed:
• to supply 24 VDC to the ADAM-8000 components
• to be installed on a t-rail along with ADAM-8000 components
• to operate as 24 VDC “stand alone” power supplies
• for installation in a control cabinet with sufficient ventilation
• for industrial applications
The following precautions apply to applications employing the ADAM8000 power supplies.
Danger!
• The power supplies must be installed in protected environments that are
only accessible to properly qualified maintenance staff!
• The power supplies are not certified for applications in explosive
environments (EX-zone)!
• You must disconnect the power supply from the main power source
before commencing installation or maintenance work, i.e. before you
start to work on a power supply or the supply cable the main supply line
must be disconnected (disconnect plugs, on permanent installations the
respective circuit breaker must be turned off)!
• Only properly qualified electrical staff is allowed to install, connect and/
or modify electrical equipment!
• To provide a sufficient level of ventilation and cooling to the power
supply components whilst maintaining the compact construction it was
not possible to protect the unit from incorrect handling and a proper
level of fire protection. For this reason the required level of fire protection must be provided by the environment where the power supply is
installed (e.g. installation in a switchboard that satisfies the fire protection rules and regulations)!
• Please adhere to the national rules and regulations of the location and/
or country where the units are installed (installation, safety precautions,
EMC ...).
Chapter 6 Powerr supplies
6-3
Power supplies
System overview
The ADAM-8000 power supplies are provided with a wide-range-input that
can be connected to 100 ... 240 VAC. The output voltage is 24 VDC at 2 A/48
W or 4A/96 W.
Since all inputs and outputs are located on the front of the unit and since
the enclosure is isolated from the back panel bus you can install the power
supply along with the ADAM-8000 on the same t-rail or you can use it as a
separate external power supply.
The following power supplies are currently available:
Ordering details
6-4
Order number
Description
ADAM 8207-1BA00
Power supply
primary AC 100...240 V, secondary DC24 V, 2 A, 48 W
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
6
Chapter
Power supply PS 207/2, 2A
Properties
The power supply is distinguished by the following properties:
• Wide-range-input 100...240 VAC without manual intervention
• 24 VDC, 2 A, 48 W output
• Can be installed on a t-rail together with other ADAM-8000 components
or as “stand alone” devices
• Protection from short-circuits, overload and open circuits
• Typically 90% efficiency at Irated
Construction
PS 2 07/2
[1]
[2]
[3]
L
OH
N
/
P
E
2
LED st at us indicat or
A C IN 100 ... 240V
DC O UT 24V, 2A, 48W
100-240V AC
550-230m A
50-60H z
1
OL
OK
OUT DC 24V / 2A
3A (pea k)
X1
1
+
DC 2 4V
2
+
DC 2 4V
-
:!
"#
3
3
4
ADAM 8207-1BA00
LED’s
The front of the power supply carries 3 LED’s for troubleshooting purposes. The following table lists the significance and the respective color.
Name
Color
Description
OH
red
Overheat: turned on by excessive temperatures
OL
yellow
Overload: turned on when the total current exceeds the
maximum capacity of app. 4 A.
OK
green
Turned on when the power supply operates properly and
supplies 24 VDC power.
Note!
Only one LED is on when the unit operates.
When all the LED’s are extinguished while the power supply is operational a short circuit is present or the power supply has failed.
Chapter 6 Powerr supplies
6-5
Power supplies
Connector wiring
Input voltage INPUT 100...240V AC
The power supply must be connected to a source of AC power via the input
connector.
A fuse protects the input from
overloads.
L
N
P
E
G
100-2 40V A C
550 -230m A
50-60H z
Output voltage OUTPUT 24 VDC, 2A
Two connectors are provided for connection to System 200V modules that
require an external source of 24 VDC.
Both outputs are protected against short circuits protected and have an
output voltage of 24 VDC with a total current of 2 A max.
OUT DC 2 4V /
2A
3A (peak )
X1
+
1
-
2
+
3
-
4
DC 24V
DC 24V
Block diagram
AC
100 -240V
DC
(+)
24V
(-)
Danger!
• You must disconnect the power supply from the main power source
before commencing installation or maintenance work, i.e. before you
start to work on a power supply or the supply cable the main supply line
must be disconnected (disconnect plugs, on permanent installations the
respective circuit breaker must be turned off)!
• Only properly qualified electrical staff is allowed to install, connect and/
or modify electrical equipment!
6-6
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
6
Installation
Installation
The power supplies can be installed by two different methods:
• You can install the power supply along with the ADAM-8000 on the
same T-rail. In this case the power supply must only be installed at one
end of your ADAM-8000 since the back panel bus would otherwise be
interrupted.
The power supplies are not connected to the back panel bus.
• Installed as “stand alone” power supply on a T-rail. Please ensure
proper and sufficient ventilation for the power supply when you select
the installation location.
Danger!
• The power supplies must be installed in protected environments that are
only accessible to properly qualified maintenance staff!
• You must disconnect the power supply from the main power source
before commencing installation or maintenance work, i.e. before you
start to work on a power supply or the supply cable the main supply line
must be disconnected (disconnect plugs, on permanent installations the
respective circuit breaker must be turned off)!
• Only properly qualified electrical staff is allowed to install, connect and/
or modify electrical equipment!
• To provide a sufficient level of ventilation and cooling to the power
supply components whilst maintaining the compact construction it was
not possible to protect the unit from incorrect handling and a proper
level of fire protection. For this reason the required level of fire protection must be provided by the environment where the power supply is
installed (e.g. installation in a switchboard that satisfies the fire protection rules and regulations)!
• Please adhere to the national rules and regulations of the location and/
or country where the units are installed (installation, safety precautions,
EMC ...).
Chapter 6 Powerr supplies
6-7
Power supplies
Wiring
Wiring
The connections to the power supply are provided by WAGO spring clip
terminals.
The terminals can accommodate wires of a diameter of 0, 8 mm2 to 2, 5 mm2.
You can use flexible multi-strand wires as well as solid conductors.
Wiring by means of spring clip terminals
Connect cables to the spring clip contacts as follows:
The sequence shown on the left explains the steps that you must follow to
wire the power supply.
• Insert a suitable screwdriver at a slight angle into the square hole as
shown.
• Push and hold the screwdriver in the opposite direction to open the
spring contact.
• Insert the stripped end of the interconnecting wire into the round hole.
You may use wires of a diameter of 0, 08 mm2 to 2, 5 mm2.
• When you remove the screwdriver the inserted wire is clamped and
connected securely by the spring clip contact.
Danger!
• You must disconnect the power supply from the main power source
before commencing installation or maintenance work, i.e. before you
start to work on a power supply or the supply cable the main supply line
must be disconnected (disconnect plugs, on permanent installations the
respective circuit breaker must be turned off)!
• Only properly qualified electrical staff is allowed to install, connect and/
or modify electrical equipment!
6-8
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
6
Technical data
Power supply
PS 207, 2A, 48W
Electrical data
PS 207/2
Rated input voltage
100 ... 240 VAC
Frequency
50 Hz / 60 Hz
Rated input current
0, 24 A / 230 VAC
power on surge
15A max.
Buffer time
(at a mains voltage AC ≥150 V)
min.10 ms
Rated output voltage
24 VDC ±5 %
Ripple
< 100 mVss incl. Spikes
Open circuit
protection
yes
Rated output current
2A (50 W); 3A (peak)
Efficiency
typ. 90% at Irated
Dissipation
5 W at the rated load
Parallel connection permitted
yes
Status indicators (LED)
via LED’s located on the front
Operating conditions
Operating temperature
0°C...55°C (55°C at reduced load)
Storage
- 25°C...+ 85°C
EMC
DIN EN 61000 / Teil4-8
Certification/CE
yes
General protection
Short circuit; overload; over temperature IP 20
Installation
DIN-rail
Terminals
Spring clip
Input L, N, PE
Output 2 x 24 VDC in parallel
Mechanical data
Dimensions (W x H x D)
25,4 x 76 x 76 mm
Weight
250 g
Ordering details
AC 100 V-240 VDC 24 V/2 A
ADAM 8207-1BA00
Chapter 6 Powerr supplies
6-9
Power supplies
6-10
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Digital input modules
7
Digital input modules
Overview
This chapter contains a description of the construction and the operation of
the Advantech digital input modules.
Below follows a description of:
• A system overview of the digital input modules
• Properties
• Constructions
• Interfacing and schematic diagram
• Technical data
7-2
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
7
System overview
Input modules SM 221
Here follows a summary of the digital input modules that are currently
available from Advantech:
Ordering details input modules
Type
Order number
Page
DI 8xDC24V
ADAM 8221-1BF00
11-4
DI 8xDC24V active low input
ADAM 8221-1BF50
11-6
DI 4xAC/DC 90...230V
ADAM 8221-1FD00
11-8
DI 8xAC/DC 60...230V
ADAM 8221-1FF20
11-10
DI 8xAC/DC 24...48V
ADAM 8221-1FF30
11-14
DI 16xDC24V
ADAM 8221-BH10
11-16
DI 16xDC24V active low input
ADAM 8221-BH50
11-18
DI 32xDC24V
ADAM 8221-2BL10
11-20
Chapter 7 Digital input modules
7-3
Digital input modules
DI 8xDC24V
Ordering details
DI 8xDC24V
ADAM 8221-1BF00
Description
The digital input accepts binary control signals from the process and
provides an electrically isolated interface to the central bus system. The
module has 8 channels, each one with a light emitting diode to indicate the
status of the channel.
Properties
•
•
•
•
8 floating inputs, isolated from the back panel bus
24 VDC rated input voltage
Suitable for standard switches and proximity switches
Status indicator for each channel by means of an LED
Construction
Status indicator connector assignment
LED
Description
.0... .7
LED’s (green)
E.0 to E.7
A “1” signal level is
recognized as of app.
15V and the respective
LED is turned on
7-4
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Assignment
not connected
Input E.0
Input E.1
Input E.2
Input E.3
Input E.4
Input E.5
Input E.6
Input E.7
Ground
Chapter
7
Wiring diagram and schematic
Wiring diagram
Schematic diagram
Technical data
Electrical data
ADAM 8221-1BF00
Number of inputs
8
Rated input voltage
24 VDC (18 ... 28, 8 V)
Signal voltage “0”
0 ... 5 V
Signal voltage “1”
15 ... 28, 8 V
Input filter time delay
3 ms
Input current
typ. 7 mA
Power supply
5 V via back panel bus
Current consumption via back panel bus
20 mA
Isolation
500 Vrms (field voltage - back panel bus)
Status indicator
via LED’s located on the front
Programming specifications
Input data
1 Byte
Output data
-
Parameter data
-
Diagnostic data
-
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm
25, 4 x 76 x 76
Weight
50 g
Chapter 7 Digital input modules
7-5
Digital input modules
DI 8xDC24V active low input
Ordering details
DI 8xDC24V active low input ADAM 8221-1BF50
Description
The digital input accepts binary control signals from the process and
provides an electrically isolated interface to the central bus system. The
module has 8 channels, each one with a light emitting diode to indicate the
status of the channel. The input becomes active when it is connected to
ground.
Properties
•
•
•
•
•
8 floating inputs, isolated from the back panel bus
Active low input (signal level ”1” when input is at ground)
24 VDC rated input voltage
Suitable for standard switches and proximity switches
Status indicator for each channel by means of an LED
Construction
Status indicator connector assignment
LED
Description
Pin
Assignment
.0... .7
LED’s (green)
1
+DC24V
E.0 to E.7
2
Input E.0
when an input is at
ground a “1” is
detected and the
respective LED is
turned on
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Input E.1
Input E.2
Input E.3
Input E.4
Input E.5
Input E.6
Input E.7 / Ground
reserved
ADAM 8221-1BF50
7-6
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
7
Wiring diagram and schematic
Wiring diagram
Schematic diagram
Technical data
Electrical data
ADAM 8221-1BF50
Number of inputs
8
Rated input voltage
24V DC (18 ... 28,8V)
Signal voltage “0”
15 ... 28, 8 V
Signal voltage “1”
0 ... 5 V
Input filter time delay
3 ms
Input current
typ. 7 mA
Power supply
5 V via back panel bus
Current consumption via back panel bus
20mA
Isolation
500 Vrms (field voltage - back panel bus)
Status indicator
via LED’s located on the front
Programming specifications
Input data
1 Byte
Output data
-
Parameter data
-
Diagnosticdata
-
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm
25, 4 x 76 x 76
Weight
50 g
Chapter 7 Digital input modules
7-7
Digital input modules
DI 4xAC/DC 90...230V
Ordering details
DI 4xAC/DC 90...230V ADAM 8221-1FD00
Description
The digital input accepts binary control signals from the process and
provides an electrically isolated interface to the central bus system.
The module has 4 channels and the respective status is displayed by
means of LED’s.
Properties
• 4 floating inputs, isolated from the back panel bus and from each other
• Status indicator for each channel by means of an LED
• Rated input voltage 90 ... 230 V AC/DC
Construction
Status indicator connector assignment
LED
.0
.1
.2
.3
Description
LED’s (green)
E.0 to E.3
from app. 80 VDC or
65 VAC (50 Hz) a
signal “1” is
detected and the
respective LED is
turned on
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
ADAM 8221-1FD00
7-8
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Assignment
not connected
E.0
Neutral conductor
E.1
Neutral conductor
E.2
Neutral conductor
E.3
Neutral conductor
not connected
E.0
E.1
E.2
E.3
Chapter
7
Wiring diagram and schematic
Wiring diagram
Schematic diagram
Technical data
Electrical data
ADAM 8221-1FD00
Number of inputs
4
Rated input voltage
AC/DC 90 ... 230 V
Signal voltage “0”
AC/DC 0 ... 35 V
Signal voltage “1”
AC/DC 90 ... 230 V
Input filter time delay
25 ms
Frequency of input voltage
50 ... 60 Hz
Input resistor
136 kΩ
Power supply
5 V via back panel bus
Current consumption via back panel bus
80 mA
Isolation
500 Vrms (field voltage - back panel bus)
Status indicator
via LED’s located on the front
Programming specifications
Input data
1 Byte (Bit 0 ... Bit 3)
Output data
-
Parameter data
-
Diagnostic data
-
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm
25, 4 x 76 x 76
Weight
50 g
Chapter 7 Digital input modules
7-9
Digital input modules
DI 8xAC/DC 60...230V
Ordering details
DI 8xAC/DC 60...230V ADAM 8221-1FF20
Description
The digital input accepts binary control signals from the process and
provides an electrically isolated interface to the central bus system. The
module has 8 channels, each one with a light emitting diode to indicate the
status of the channel.
Properties
• 8 inputs, isolated from the back panel bus
• Rated input voltage 60 ... 230 VAC/DC
• Status indicator for each channel by means of an LED
Construction
Status indicator connector assignment
LED
.0... .7
Description
LED’s (green)
E.0 to E.7 from app.
55 VDC or 45 VAC (50
Hz) a signal “1” is
detected and the
respective LED is
turned on
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
ADAM 8221-1FF20
7-10
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Assignment
not connected
Input E.0
Input E.1
Input E.2
Input E.3
Input E.4
Input E.5
Input E.6
Input E.7
Neutral conductor
Chapter
7
Wiring diagram and schematic
Wiring diagram
Schematic diagram
Technical data
Electrical data
ADAM 8221-1FF20
Number of inputs
8
Rated input voltage
AC/DC 60 ... 230 V
Signal voltage “0”
AC/DC 0 ... 35 V
Signal voltage “1”
AC/DC 60 ... 230 V
Input filter time delay
25 ms
Frequency of input voltage
50 ... 60 Hz
Input resistor
136 k
Power supply
5 V via back panel bus
Current consumption via back panel bus
80 mA
Isolation
500 Vrms (field voltage - back panel bus)
Status indicator
via LED’s located on the front
Programming specifications
Input data
1 Byte
Output data
-
Parameter data
-
Diagnostic data
-
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm
25, 4 x 76 x 76
Weight
50 g
Chapter 7 Digital input modules
7-11
Digital input modules
DI 8xAC/DC 24...48V
Ordering details
DI 8xAC/DC 24...48V ADAM 8221-1FF30
Description
The digital input accepts binary control signals from the process and
provides an electrically isolated interface to the central bus system. The
module has 8 channels, each one with a light emitting diode to indicate the
status of the channel.
Properties
• 8 floating inputs, isolated from the back panel bus
• Rated input voltage AC/DC 24 ... 48V
• Status indicator for each channel by means of an LED
Construction
Status indicator connector assignment
LED
.0... .7
Description
LED’s (green)
E.0 to E.7 from app.
14 VDC or 12VAC
(50Hz) a signal “1” is
detected and the
respective LED is
turned on
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
ADAM 8221-1FF30
7-12
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Assignment
not connected
Input E.0
Input E.1
Input E.2
Input E.3
Input E.4
Input E.5
Input E.6
Input E.7
Neutral conductor
Chapter
7
Wiring diagram and schematic
Wiring diagram
Schematic diagram
Technical data
Electrical data
ADAM 8221-1FF30
Number of inputs
8
Rated input voltage
AC/DC 24 ... 48 V
Signal voltage “0”
AC/DC 0 ... 8 V
Signal voltage “1”
AC/DC 18 ... 48 V
Input filter time delay
25ms
Frequency of input voltage
50 ... 60 Hz
Input resistor
16, 4 k
Power supply
5 V via back panel bus
Current consumption via back panel bus
80 mA
Isolation
500 Vrms (field voltage - back panel bus)
Status indicator
via LED’s located on the front
Programming specifications
Input data
1 Byte
Output data
-
Parameter data
-
Diagnostic data
-
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm
25, 4 x 76 x 76
Weight
50 g
Chapter 7 Digital input modules
7-13
Digital input modules
DI 16xDC24V
Ordering details
DI 16xDC24V ADAM 8221-1BH10
Description
The digital input accepts binary control signals from the process and
provides an electrically isolated interface to the central bus system. It has
16 channels that indicate the respective status by means of LED’s.
Properties
•
•
•
•
16 inputs, isolated from the back panel bus
24 VDC rated input voltage
Suitable for standard switches and proximity switches
Status indicator for each channel by means of an LED
Construction
Status indicator connector assignment
LED Description
.0 ... .7 LED’s (green)
E.0 to E.7 (per byte)
A “1” signal level is
recognized as of app.
15V and the respective LED is turned on
7-14
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Pin
1
2
3
4
.
.
.
15
16
17
18
Assignment
not connected
Input E.0
Input E.1
Input E.2
.
.
.
Input E.13
Input E.14
Input E 15
Ground
Chapter
7
Wiring and schematic diagram
Wiring diagram
Schematic diagram
Technical data
Electrical data
ADAM 8221-1BH10
Number of inputs
16
Rated input voltage
24 VDC (18 ... 28, 8 V)
Signal voltage “0”
0 ... 5 V
Signal voltage “1”
15 ... 28, 8 V
Input filter time delay
3 ms
Input current
typ. 7 mA
Power supply
5 V via back panel bus
Current consumption via back panel bus
20 mA
Isolation
500 Vrms (field voltage - back panel bus)
Status indicator
via LED’s located on the front
Programming specifications
Input data
2 Byte
Output data
-
Parameter data
-
Diagnostic data
-
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm
25, 4 x 76 x 76
Weight
50 g
Chapter 7 Digital input modules
7-15
Digital input modules
DI 16xDC24V active low input
Ordering details
DI 16xDC24V active low input ADAM 8221-1BH50
Description
The digital input accepts binary control signals from the process and
provides an electrically isolated interface to the central bus system. The input
becomes active when it is connected to ground. This module requires a
converter (DEA-UB4x). It has 16 channels that indicate the respective status
via LED’s on the UB4x. The module must be connected to the converter
module (DEA-UB4x) by means of a flattened round cable (DEA KB91C).
Properties
• 16 inputs, isolated from the back panel bus
• Active low input (signal level ”1” when input is at ground)
• 24 VDC rated input voltage
• Suitable for standard switches and proximity switches
• Status indicator for each channel by means of a LED on the conversion module
Construction
Status indicator on UB4x
LED
0... .15
L+ L-
7-16
Connector
Description
LED’s (yellow)
E.0 to E.7 High
E.0 to E.7 Low
A “1” signal level is
recognized as of
app. 15V and the
respective
LED is turned on
LED (green)
Supply voltage
available
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Connector assignment module
Pin
23...26
22
21
.
.
.
8
7
1...6
Assignment
Supply voltage
+24V DC
Input E.0
Input E.1
.
.
Input E.14
Input E.15
Supply voltage Ground
Chapter
Interface to UB4x
7
Schematic diagram module
Technical data
Electrical data
ADAM 8221-1BH50
Number of inputs
16
Rated input voltage
24 VDC (18 ... 28, 8 V)
Signal voltage “0”
15 ... 28, 8 V
Signal voltage “1”
0 ... 5 V
Input filter time delay
3 ms
Input current
typ. 7 mA
Power supply
5 V via back panel bus
Current consumption via back panel bus
20 mA
Isolation
500 Vrms (field voltage - back panel bus)
Status indicator
via LED’s located on the UB4x
Programming specifications
Input data
2 Byte
Output data
-
Parameter data
-
Diagnostic data
-
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm
25, 4 x 76 x 76
Weight
50 g
Chapter 7 Digital input modules
7-17
Digital input modules
DI 32xDC24V
Ordering details
DI 32xDC24V ADAM 8221-2BL10
Description
The digital input accepts binary control signals from the process and
provides an electrically isolated interface to the central bus system It has
32 channels that indicate the respective status by means of LED’s.
Properties
•
•
•
•
32 inputs, isolated from the back panel bus
24 VDC rated input voltage
Suitable for standard switches and proximity switches
Status indicator for each channel by means of an LED
Construction
Status indicator connector assignment
LED
0... .15
Description
LED’s (green)
E.0 to E.7 (per
byte)
A “1” signal level
is recognized as
of app. 15V and
the respective
LED is turned on
Pin
1
2...17
.
.
.
18
19
.
.
.
20 ... 35
36
ADAM 8221-2BL10
7-18
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Assignment
Not connected
Input E.0...E.15
.
.
.
Ground
Not connected
.
.
.
Input E.16...E.31
Ground
Chapter
7
Wiring and schematic diagram
Wiring diagram
Schematic diagram
Technical data
Electrical data
ADAM 8221-2BL10
Number of inputs
32
Rated input voltage
24 VDC (18 ... 28, 8 V)
Signal voltage “0”
0 ... 5 V
Signal voltage “1”
15 ... 28, 8 V
Input filter time delay
3 ms
Input current
typ. 7 mA
Power supply
5 V via back panel bus
Current consumption via back panel bus
20 mA
Isolation in 2 groups of 16 inputs each
500 Vrms (field voltage - back panel bus)
Status indicator
via LED’s located on the front
Programming specifications
Input data
4 Byte
Output data
-
Parameter data
-
Diagnostic data
-
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm
50, 8 x 76 x 76
Weight
50 g
Chapter 7 Digital input modules
7-19
Digital input modules
7-20
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Digital output modules
8
Digital output modules
Overview
This chapter contains a description of the construction and the operation of
the Advantech digital output modules.
Below follows a description of:
• A system overview of the digital output modules
• Properties
• Construction
• Interfacing and schematic diagram
• Technical data
8-2
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
8
System overview
Output modules SM 222
Here follows a summary of the digital output modules that are currently
available from Advantech:
DC24V output modules
Ordering details DC24V output modules
Type
Order number
Page
DO 8xDC24V 1A
ADAM 8222-1BF00
12-4
DO 8xDC24V 2A
ADAM 8222-1BF10
12-6
DO 16xDC24V 1A
ADAM 8222-1BH10
12-10
DO 32xDC24V 1A
ADAM 8222-2BL10
12-14
Chapter 8 Digital output modules
8-3
Digital output modules
Relay output module
Ordering details relay output modules
Type
8-4
Order number
Page
DO 8xRelais COM
ADAM 8222-1HF00
12-16
DO 4xRelais COM
ADAM 8222-1HD00
12-18
DO 4xRelais
ADAM 8222-1HD10
12-20
DO 4xRelais bistable
ADAM 8222-1HD20
12-22
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
8
DO 8xDC24V 1A
Ordering details
DO 8xDC24V 1A ADAM 8222-1BF00
Description
The digital output module accepts binary control signals from the central
bus system and transfers them to the process level via outputs. The module
requires a supply of 24V DC via the connector on the front. It provides 8
channels and the status of each channel is displayed by means of an LED.
Properties
•
•
•
•
•
•
8 outputs, isolated from the back panel bus
24V DC supply voltage
1A output current rating
Suitable for magnetic valves and DC contactors
LED’s for supply voltage and error message
Active channel indication by means of an LED
Construction
Status indicator connector assignment
LED
L+
.0... .7
F
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Description
LED (yellow) Supply
voltage available
LED’s (green)
A.0 to A.7
when an output is active
the respective LED is
turned on
LED (red) Overload,
overheat or short circuit
error
Assignment
24 VDC supply voltage
Output A.0
Output A.1
Output A.2
Output A.3
Output A.4
Output A.5
Output A.6
Output A.7
Supply ground
ADAM 8222-1BF00
Chapter 8 Digital output modules
8-5
Digital output modules
Wiring diagram and schematic
Wiring diagram
Schematic diagram
Technical data
Electrical data
ADAM 8222-1BF00
Number of outputs
8
Rated load voltage
24 VDC (18 ... 35 V) from ext. power supply
No-load current consumption at L+ (all A.x=off) 10 mA
Output current per channel
1 A protected against sustained short circuits
Current consumption via back panel bus
50 mA
Voltage supply
5 V via back panel bus
Status indicator
via LED’s located on the front
Programming specifications
Input data
-
Output data
1 Byte
Parameter data
-
Diagnostic data
-
Dimensions and weight
8-6
Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm
25, 4 x 76 x 76
Weight
50 g
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
8
DO 8xDC24V 2A
Ordering details
DO 8xDC24V 2A ADAM 8222-1BF10
Description
The digital output module accepts binary control signals from the central
bus system and transfers them to the process level via outputs. The module
requires a 24V DC supply via the connector located on the front. It provides
8 channels and the status of each channel is displayed by means of an LED.
The maximum load current per output is 2A.
Properties
• 8 outputs, isolated from the back panel bus
• 24 VDC supply voltage
• Output current 2 A
• Suitable for magnetic valves and DC contactors
• LED’s for supply voltage and error message
• Active channel indication by means of an LED
Construction
Status indicator connector assignment
LED
L+
.0... .7
F
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Description
LED (yellow)
Supply voltage available
LED’s (green)
A.0 to A.7
when an output becomes
active the respective LED
is turned on
LED (red)
Overload, overheat, short
circuit error
Assignment
24 VDC supply voltage
Output A.0
Output A.1
Output A.2
Output A.3
Output A.4
Output A.5
Output A.6
Output A.7
Supply ground
ADAM 8222-1BF10
Chapter 8 Digital output modules
8-7
Digital output modules
Wiring diagram and schematic
Wiring diagram
Schematic diagram
Technical data
Electrical data
ADAM 8222-1BF10
Number of outputs
8
Rated load voltage
24 VDC (18 ... 35 V) from ext. power supply
No-load current consumption at L+ (all A.x=off) 10 mA
Output current per channel
2 A short circuit protected
Diversity factor
ID=50% (8 A)
Current consumption via back panel bus
50 mA
Total current of all 8 channels
10 A
Voltage supply
5 V via back panel bus
Status indicator
via LED’s located on the front
Programming specifications
Input data
-
Output data
1 Byte
Parameter data
-
Diagnostic data
-
Dimensions and weight
8-8
Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm
25, 4 x 76 x 76
Weight
50 g
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
8
DO 16xDC24V 1A
Ordering details
DO 16xDC24V 1A ADAM 8222-1BH10
Description
The digital output module accepts binary control signals from the central
bus system and transfers them to the process level via outputs. The module
requires 24V via the connector on the front. Es hat 16 channels and the
status of each channel is displayed by means of an LED.
Properties
• 16 outputs, isolated from the back panel bus
• 24 VDC supply voltage
• 1A output current rating
• Suitable for magnetic valves and DC contactors
• LED’s for supply voltage and error message
• Active channel indication by means of an LED
Construction
Status indicator connector assignment
LED
Description
L+
A.0 ... A.7 ED (yellow)
Supply voltage available
F
LED’s (green)
A.0 to A.7 (per Byte)
when an output is active
the respective LED is
turned on
L
LED (red)
Overload, overheat or
short circuit error
Pin
1
2
3
.
.
.
16
17
18
Assignment
24 VDC supply
voltage
Output A.0
Output A.1
.
.
.
Output A.14
Output A.15
Supply ground
ADAM 8222-1BH10
Chapter 8 Digital output modules
8-9
Digital output modules
Wiring diagram and schematic
Wiring diagram
Schematic diagram
Technical data
Electrical data
ADAM 8222-1BH10
Number of outputs
16
Rated load voltage
24 VDC (18 ... 35 V) from ext. power supply
No-load current consumption at L+ (all A.x=off) 10 mA
Output current per channel
1A short circuit protected
max. total current
10 A
Current consumption via back panel bus
85 mA
Voltage supply
5 V via back panel bus
Status indicator
via LED’s located on the front
Programming specifications
Input data
-
Output data
2 Byte
Parameter data
-
Diagnostic data
-
Dimensions and weight
8-10
Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm
25, 4 x 76 x 76
Weight
50 g
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
8
DO 32xDC24V 1A
Ordering details
DO 32xDC24V 1A ADAM 8222-2BL10
Description
The digital output module accepts binary control signals from the central
bus system and transfers them to the process level via outputs. The module
requires 24V via the connector on the front. Es hat 32 channels and the
status of each channel is displayed by means of an LED.
Properties
• 32 outputs, isolated from the back panel bus
• 24 VDC supply voltage
• Output current per channel 1A
• Suitable for magnetic valves and DC contactors
• LED’s for supply voltage and error message
• Active channel indication by means of an LED
Construction
Status indicator connector assignment
LED
L+
.0 ... .7
F
Description
LED (yellow)
Supply voltage
available
LED’s (green)
A.0 to A.7 (per Byte)
when an output is
active the
respective LED is
turned on
LED (red)
Overload, overheat
or short circuit error
ADAM 8222-2BL10
Pin
1
2
3
...
17
18
19
20
...
34
35
36
Assignment
24 VDC supply voltage
Output A.0
Output A.1
...
Output A.15
Supply ground
24 VDC supply voltage
Output A.16
...
Output A.30
Output A.31
Supply ground
Chapter 8 Digital output modules
8-11
Digital output modules
Wiring diagram and schematic
Wiring diagram
Schematic diagram
Technical data
Electrical data
ADAM 8222-2BL10
Number of outputs
32
Rated load voltage
24 VDC (18 ... 35V) from ext. power supply
No-load current consumption at L+ (all A.x=off) 15 mA
max. Output current per channel
1A short circuit protected
max. Contact load
10 A
Current consumption via back panel bus
165 mA
Voltage supply
5 V via back panel bus in groups of 16 outputs
each
Status indicator
via LED’s located on the front
Programming specifications
Input data
-
Output data
4 Byte
Parameter data
-
Diagnostic data
-
Dimensions and weight
8-12
Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm
50, 8 x 76 x 76
Weight
50 g
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
8
DO 8xRelais COM
Ordering details
DO 8xRelais COM ADAM 8222-1HF00
Description
The digital output module accepts binary control signals from the central bus
system and controls the connected loads at the process level via relay
outputs. The module derives power from the back panel bus. The load voltage
must be connected to terminal 1. When the total current exceeds 8A you must
balance the load current between terminals 1 and 10. The module has 8
channels and the status of each channel is displayed by means of an LED.
Properties
• 8 Relay outputs
• Power supply via back panel bus
• External load voltage 230 V / DC 30 VAC
• Output current per channel 5A (230 V / DC 30 VAC)
• Suitable for motors, lamps, magnetic valves and DC contactors
• Active channel indication by means of an LED
Construction
Status indicator connector assignment
LED
.0... .7
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Description
LED’s (green)
A.0 to A.7
when an output is active
the respective LED is
turned on
Assignment
Supply voltage L
Relay output. A.0
Relay output. A.1
Relay output. A.2
Relay output. A.3
Relay output. A.4
Relay output. A.5
Relay output. A.6
Relay output. A.7
Supply voltage L
ADAM 8222-1HF00
Chapter 8 Digital output modules
8-13
Digital output modules
Wiring diagram and schematic
Wiring diagram
Maximum load
8-14
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Schematic diagram
Service life
Chapter
8
Technical data
Electrical data
ADAM 8222-1HF00
Number of outputs
8 via relay
Rated load voltage
230 VAC or 30 VDC max.
No-load current consumption at L+ (all A.x=off) Total current
with 1 L: max. 8 A with 2 L: max. 16 A
max. Output current per channel
AC 230 V: 5 A / DC 30 V: 5A
Current consumption via back panel bus
250 mA
Voltage supply
5 V via back panel bus
Switching rate
max. 100 Hz
Status indicator
via LED’s located on the front
Programming specifications
Input data
-
Outputdata
1 Byte
Parameter data
-
Diagnostic data
-
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm
25, 4 x 76 x 76
Weight
80 g
Chapter 8 Digital output modules
8-15
Digital output modules
DO 4xRelais COM
Ordering details
DO 4xRelais COM ADAM 8222-1HD00
Description
The digital output module accepts binary control signals from the central
bus system and controls the connected loads at the process level via relay
outputs. The module derives power from the back panel bus. The module
has 4 channels and the status of each channel is displayed by means of an
LED. The load voltage that is applied to a channel when the signal is “1”
must be connected to terminals 1 and 10.
Properties
• 4 Relay outputs with a common return
• Power supply via back panel bus
• External load voltage 230 V/ DC 30 VAC
• Output current per channel 5 A (230 V / DC 30 VAC)
• Suitable for motors, lamps, magnetic valves and DC contactors
• Active channel indication by means of an LED
Construction
Status indicator connector assignment
LED
.0... .3
Description
LED’s (green)
A.0 to A.3
when an output is active
the respective LED is
turned on
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
ADAM 8222-1HD00
8-16
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Assignment
Supply voltage
Relay output. A.0
not connected
Relay output. A.1
not connected
Relay output. A.2
not connected
Relay output. A.3
not connected
Supply voltage
Chapter
8
Wiring diagram and schematic
Wiring diagram
Schematic diagram
Maximum load
Service life
Chapter 8 Digital output modules
8-17
Digital output modules
Technical data
Electrical data
ADAM 8222-1HD00
Number of outputs
4 via relay
Rated load voltage
230 VAC or 30 VDC
No-load current consumption at L+ (all A.x=off) Total current
max. 8 A
max. Output current per channel
AC 230V: 5A / DC 30V: 5A
Current consumption via back panel bus
125 mA
Voltage supply
5 V via back panel bus
Switching rate
max. 100 Hz
Status indicator
via LED’s located on the front
Programming specifications
Input data
-
Outputdata
1 Byte (Bit 0 ... Bit 3)
Parameter data
-
Diagnosticdata
-
Dimensions and weight
8-18
Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm
25, 4 x 76 x 76
Weight
80 g
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
8
DO 4xRelais
Ordering details
DO 4xRelais ADAM 8222-1HD10
Description
The digital output module accepts binary control signals from the central
bus system and controls the connected loads at the process level via relay
outputs. The module derives power from the back panel bus. The module
has 4 isolated channels that operate as switches and the status of each
channel is displayed by means of a LED. Power required by active loads
must be supplied externally.
Properties
• 4 galvanically isolated relay-outputs
• Power supply via back panel bus
• External load voltage 230 VAC / 30 VDC (may be mixed)
• Max. output current per channel 5 A (230 VAC / 30VDC)
• Suitable for motors, lamps, magnetic valves and DC contactors
• Active channel indication by means of an LED
Construction
Status indicator connector assignment
LED
.0... .3
Description
LED’s (green)
A.0 to A.3
when an output is
active the respective
LED is turned on
Pin
1
2+3
4+5
6+7
8+9
10
Assignment
not connected
Relay output. A.0
Relay output. A.1
Relay output. A.2
Relay output. A.3
not connected
ADAM 8222-1HD10
Chapter 8 Digital output modules
8-19
Digital output modules
Wiring diagram and schematic
Wiring diagram
Maximum load
8-20
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Schematic diagram
Service life
Chapter
8
Technical data
Electrical data
ADAM 8222-1HD10
Number of outputs
4 via relay
Rated load voltage
230 VAC or max. 30 VDC
max. Output current
230 VAC: 5 A / 30 VDC: 5 A
Current consumption via back panel bus
125 mA
Voltage supply
5 V via back panel bus
Switching rate
max. 100 Hz
Status indicator
via LED’s located on the front
Programming specifications
Input data
-
Output data
1 Byte (Bit 0 ... Bit 3)
Parameter data
-
Diagnostic data
-
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm
25, 4 x 76 x 76
Weight
80 g
Chapter 8 Digital output modules
8-21
Digital output modules
DO 4xRelais bistable
Ordering details
DO 4xRelay bistable ADAM 8222-1HD20
Description
The digital output module accepts binary control signals from the central
bus system and controls the connected loads at the process level via
bistable relay outputs. The module derives power from the back panel bus.
The module has 4 channels that operate as switches. The status of the
respective switch is retained if the power from the controlling system fails.
Properties
•
•
•
•
•
4 galvanically isolated relay outputs
Power supply via back panel bus
External load voltage 230 VAC / 30 VDC (may be mixed)
Max. Output current per channel 16A (230VAC / 30 VDC)
Suitable for motors, lamps, magnetic valves and DC contactors
Construction
Output byte / Connector assignment
Bit
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
When one of bits 0...3 is set the
respective channel is activated. Setting
one of bits 4..7 resets the respective
output after at least 50ms.
8-22
Pin
1
2+3
4+5
6+7
8+9
10
Description
set A.0
set A.1
set A.2
set A.3
reset A.0
reset A.1
reset A.2
reset A.3
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
ADAM 8222-1HD20
Assignment
not connected
Relay output. A.0
Relay output. A.1
Relay output. A.2
Relay output. A.3
not connected
Chapter
8
Wiring diagram and schematic
Wiring diagram
Schematic diagram
Signaling diagram
Note!
Please remember that a relay output that has been set can only be reset
after at least 50ms when the set-signal has been removed.
Technical data
Electrical data
ADAM 8222-1HD20
Number of outputs
4 via relay
Rated load voltage
230 VAC or 30 VDC
max. Output current per channel
AC 230 V: 16 A/DC 30 V: 16 A
Current consumption via back panel bus
125 mA
Voltage supply
5 V via back panel bus
Switching rate
max. 100 Hz
Status indicator
-
Programming specifications
Input data
-
Output data
1 Byte
Parameter data
-
Diagnostic data
-
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm
25, 4 x 76 x 76
Weight
80 g
Chapter 8 Digital output modules
8-23
Digital output modules
8-24
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Analog input modules
9
Analog input modules
Overview
This chapter contains a description of the construction and the operation of
the Advantech analog input modules.
Below follows a description of:
• A system overview of the analog input modules
• Properties
• Constructions
• Interfacing and schematic diagram
• Technical data
System overview
Input modules SM 231
Here follows a summary of the analog input modules that are currently
available from Advantech:
Ordering details input modules
9-2
Type
Order number
AI4x16Bit, multi-input
ADAM 8231-1BD52
AI4x12Bit, 4 ... 20mA, isolated
ADAM 8231-1BD60
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
9
General
Cabling for analog signals
You should only use screened twisted pair cable when you are connecting
analogue signals. These cables reduce the effect of electrical interference.
The screen of the analogue signal cable should be grounded at both ends.
In situations where the equipment at the being connected by the cable is at
different electrical potentials it is possible that a current will flow to equalize
the potential difference. This current could interfere with the analog signals.
Under these circumstances it is advisable to ground the screen of the signal
cable at one end only.
Connecting transducers
Our analogue input modules provide a large number of input configurations
for 2-wire and 4-wire transducers.
Please remember that transducers require an external power source. You
must connect an external power supply in line with any 2-wire transducer.
The following diagram explains the connection of 2- and 4-wire transducers:
2-Wire interfacing
1
4- Wire interfacing
1
2
2
transducer 1
3
DC 24V
-
+
4 ... 20mA
4
transducer 1
3
DC 24V
-
+
4 ... 20mA
6
7
10
transducer 2
5
4 ... 20mA
DC 24V
6
DC 24V
-
+
transducer 3
transducer 3
4 ... 20mA
8
9
DC 24V
4
transducer 2
5
4 ... 20mA
7
4 ... 20mA
DC 24V
8
DC 24V
-
+
transducer 4
transducer 4
4 ... 20mA
9
4 ... 20mA
DC 24V
10
Note!
Please ensure that you connect transducers with the correct polarity!
Unused inputs should be short circuited by placing a link between the
positive connection and the common ground for the channel.
Chapter 9 Analog input modules
8-3
Analog input modules
AI 4x16Bit, multi-Input
Ordering details
AI 4x16Bit multi-input ADAM 8231-1BD52
Description
The module has 4 inputs that can you can configure individually. The
module requires a total of 8 input data bytes in the process image (2 bytes
per channel).
Isolation between the channels on the module and the back panel bus is
provided by means of DC/DC converters and optocouplers.
• the different channels are individually configurable and can be turned off
• the common signal inputs of the channels are isolated from each other
and the permitted potential difference is up to 5 V
• LED for signaling open circuits in current loop operation
• Diagnostic function
Properties Construction
Status indicators Connector assignment
LED
F0 ... F3
Description
LED (red):
turned on when an open
circuit exists on the 4 ... 20
mA sensor circuits
blinks when the current > 40
mA current sensor circuits
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
ADAM 8231-1BD52
9-4
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Assignment
For four-wire
systems channel 0
+ channel 0
Channel 0 common
+ channel 1
Channel 1 common
+ channel 2
Channel 2 common
+ channel 3
Channel 3 common
For four-wire
systems channel 2
Chapter
9
Wiring diagrams
Note!
Please note that the module ADAM 8231-1BD52 was developed from the
ADAM 8231-1BD52. The measuring function no longer starts at 00h but it
is offset by one to 01h. The measurement function no. 00h does not affect
permanently stored configuration data.
Note!
Unused inputs on activated channels must be connected to the respective ground. This is not necessary when the unused channels are turned
off by means of FFh.
Chapter 9 Analog input modules
8-5
Analog input modules
Function no. Assignment
No.
Function
Measurement range/representation
Tolerance Conn.
00h Does not affect permanently stored configuration data
1 2 3
(3)
02h Pt1000 in two-wire mode -200 .. +500°C/in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
1 2 3
(3)
03h NI100 in two-wire mode
-50 .. +250°C /in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
1 2 3
(3)
04h NI1000 in two-wire mode -50 .. +250°C /in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
1 2 3
01h Pt100 in two-wire mode
-200.. +850°C/in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
) ) ) ±1°C
) ) ) ±1°C
) ) ) ±1°C
(3)
1 2 3
05h
Resistance measurement
- / 60Ω = final value (32767)
60Ohm two-wire
) ) ) ±0,2%
of final value
(3)
06h
Resistance measurement
- / 600Ω = final value (32767)
600Ohm two-wire
1 2 3
) ) ) ±0,1%
of final value
(3)
Resistance measurement
07h
- /3000Ω = final value (32767)
3000Ohm two-wire
08h
Resistance measurement
- /6000Ω = final value (32767)
6000Ohm two-wire
09h
Pt100 via four-wire
connection
Pt1000 via four-wire
0Ah
connection
0Bh
NI100 via four-wire
connection
NI1000 via four-wire
0Ch
connection
0Dh
1 2 3
) ) ) ±0,1%
of final value
(3)
1 2 3
) ) ) ±0,1%
of final value
(3)
-200 .. +850°C/in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
1 2
(4)
-200 .. +50°C/in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
1 2
(4)
-50 .. +250°C/in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
1 2
(4)
1 2
(4)
-50 .. +250°C/in units of 1/10°C, two’s complement
Resistance measurement
- /60Ω = final value (32767)
60Ohm four-wire
Resistance measurement
0Eh
- /600Ω = final value (32767)
600Ohm four-wire
0Fh
Resistance measurement
- /3000Ω = final value (32767)
3000Ohm four-wire
10h
Thermoelement type J ,
externally compensated
-210°C .. 850°C /in units of 1/10°C, two’s
complement
) ) ±0,5°C
) ) ±0,5°C
) ) ±0,5°C
) ) ±0,5°C
1 2
) ) ±0,1%of
final value
(4)
1 2
) ) ±0,05%
of final value
(4)
1 2
) ) ±0,05%
of final value
(4)
1 2 4
) ) ) ±1°C
(2)
Thermoelement type K,
11h
externally compensated
-270°C .. 1200°C /in units of 1/10°C, two’s
complement
1 2 4
(2)
Thermoelement type N,
externally compensated
-200°C .. 1300°C /in units of 1/10°C, two’s
complement
1 2 4
) ) ) ±1,5°C
(2)
1 2 4
(2)
12h
Thermoelement type R,
13h
externally compensated
-50°C .. 1760°C /in units of 1/10°C, two’s
complement
14h
Thermoelement type T,
externally compensated
-270°C .. 400°C /in units of 1/10°C, two’s
complement
15h
Thermoelement type S,
externally compensated
-50°C .. 1760°C /in units of 1/10°C, two’s
complement
Thermoelement type J,
18h
internally compensated
-210°C .. 850°C /in units of 1/10°C, two’s
complement1)2)5)
) ) ) ±1,5°C
) ) ) ±4°C
1 2 4
) ) ) ±1.5°C
(2)
1 2 4
(2)
) ) ) ±5°C
1 2 4
) ) ) ±1.5°C
(2)
Thermoelement type K,
internally compensated
-270°C .. 1200°C / in units of 1/10°C, two’s
complement
1 2 5
(2)
Thermoelement type N,
1Ah
internally compensated
-200°C .. 1300°C /in units of 1/10°C, two’s
complement
1 2 5
(2)
-50°C .. 1760°C/in units of 1/10°C, two’s
complement
1 2 5
(2)
19h
1Bh
9-6
) ) ) ±1°C
Thermoelement type R,
internally compensated
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
) ) ) ±2°C
) ) ) ±2°C
) ) ) ±5°C
9
Chapter
No.
Function
Measurement range/representation
Tolerance Conn.
Thermoelement type T,
1Ch
internally compensated
-270°C .. 400°C/in units of 1/10°C, two’s
complement
1 2 5
(2)
Thermoelement type S,
1Dh
internally compensated
-50°C .. 1760°C/in units of 1/10°C, two’s
complement
1 2 4
) ) ) ±5°C
(2)
) ±0,1% of
final value
(1)
) ±0,05% of
final value
(1)
Voltage 0...50 mV
27h
Siemens S7-format
0...50 mV/59, 25 mV = maximum usable range
before over range occurs
(32767)
0...50 mV = rated value (0...27648)
Voltage ±10 V Siemens
28h
S7-format
±11, 85 V/11,85 V = max. value before over range
occurs (32767)
-10...10 V= rated range (-27648...27648)
-11, 85 V= min. value before under range (-32767)
two’s complement
Voltage ±4 V Siemens
29h
S7-format
±4, 74 V/4, 74 V = max. value before over range
occurs (32767)
-4...4 V = rated range (-27648...27648)
-4, 74 V = min. value before under range (-32767)
two’s complement
Voltage ±400 mV
2Ah
Siemens S7-format
±0, 474 V/474 mV = max. value before over range
occurs (32767)
-400...400 mV = rated range (-27648...27648)
-474 mV = min. value before under range (-32767)
two’s complement
Voltage ±10 V
2Bh
Siemens S5-format
±11, 85 V /12, 5 V = max. value before over range
occurs (20480)
-10...10 V = rated range (-16384...16384)
-12, 5 V = min. value before under range (-20480)
Numeric representation: same as for AI 4x12Bit
Current ±20 mA
2Ch
Siemens S7-format
±23, 70 mA /23, 70 mA = max. value before over
range occurs (32767)
-20...20 mA = rated value (-27648...27648)
-23, 70 mA = min. value before under range (-32767)
two’s complement
Current 4...20 mA
2Dh
Siemens S7-format
1,185 .. +22, 96 mA/22, 96 mA
= max. value before over range occurs (32767)
4 ... 20 mA = rated range (0...27648)
0 mA = min. value before under range (-5530)
) ) ) ±2°C
1
1
1
) ±0,05% of
final value
(1)
1
) ±0,1% of
final value
(1)
1
) ±0,2% of
final value
(1)
) ±0,05%of
final value
(1)
) ±0,05% of
final value
(1)
1
1
2Eh
Current 4 ... 20 mA
Siemens S5-format
1,185 .. +22, 96 mA /22,96 mA =
max. value before over range occurs (20480)
20 mA = rated range (0...16384)
0mA = min. value before under range (-4096)
Numeric notation: same as AI 4x12Bit
) ±0,2% of
final value
(1)
2Fh
Current ±20 mA
Siemens S5-format
±23, 70 mA /23, 70 mA = max. value before over
range occurs (19456)
1
) ±0,05% of
-20...20 mA = rated value (-16384...16384)
final value
-23,70 mA = min. value before under range (-19456)
two’s complement
(1)
32h
Resistance measurement
-/6000Ω= final value (32767)
6000Ohm four-wire
1 2
) ) ±0,05%
of final value
(4)
Resistance measurement
- /6000Ω = final value (6000)
33h
6000Ohm four-wire
35h
Resistance measurement
- /60Ω = final value (6000)
60Ohm two-wire
Resistance measurement
36h
- /600Ω = final value (6000)
600Ohm two-wire
1
1 2
) ) ±0,05%
of final value
(4)
1 2 3
) ) ) ±0,2%
of final value
(3)
1 2 3
) ) ) ±0,1%
of final value
Chapter 9 Analog input modules
(3)
8-7
Analog input modules
No.
Function
Measurement range/representation
Resistance measurement
37h
- /3000Ω = final value (30000)
3000Ohm two-wire
Resistance measurement
38h
- /6000Ω = final value (6000)
6000Ohm two-wire
3Dh
Resistance measurement
- /60Ω = final value (6000)
60Ohm four-wire
Resistance measurement
3Eh
- /600Ω = final value (6000)
600Ohm four-wire
3Fh
) ) ) ±0,1%
of final value
(3)
1 2 3
) ) ) ±0,1%
of final value
(3)
1 2
) ) ±0,1% of
final value
(4)
1 2
) ) ±0,05%
of final value
(4)
1 2
) ) ±0,05%
of final value
(4)
0...50 mV /59.25 mV = max. value before over range
1
occurs (5925)
) ±0,1% of
0...50 mV = rated range (0...5000)
final value
two’s complement
(1)
Resistance measurement
- /3000Ω = final value (30000)
3000Ohm four-wire
57h Voltage 0...50 mV
Tolerance Conn.
1 2 3
±11, 85 V / 11, 85 V= max. value before over range
1
58h Voltage ±10V
)
)
)
4
)
5
)
2
3
(1)
±4, 74 V /4, 74 V = max. value before over range
occurs (47400)
-4...4 V = rated range (-40000...40000)
-4, 74 V = min. value before under range (-47400)
two’s complement
5Ah Voltage ±400 mV
±0, 474 V/474 mV = max. value before over range
occurs (47400)
-400...400 mV = rated range (-40000...40000)
-474 mV = min. value before under range (-47400)
two’s complement
) ±0,1% of
final value
(1)
5Ch Current ±2 0 mA
±23, 70 mA /23, 70 mA = max. value before over
range occurs (23700)
1
) ±0,05% of
-20... 20 mA = rated value (-20000...20000)
final value
-23, 70 mA = min. value before under range (-23700)
two’s complement
(1)
5Dh Current 4...2 0 mA
1, 185 .. +22, 96 mA /22 ,96 mA =
max. value before over range occurs (22960)
4...20 mA = rated range (0...16000)
0 mA = min. value before under range (-400)
two’s complement
(1)
1
) ±0,05% of
final value
(1)
1
1
) ±0,05% of
final value
Channel not active
(turned off)
measured at an ambient temperature of 25°C, velocity of 15 conversions/s
excluding errors caused by transducer inaccuracies
excluding errors caused by contact resistance and line resistance
the compensation of the neutralization must be implemented externally
the compensation for the neutralization is implemented internally by including the temperature
of the front plug. The thermal conductors must be connected directly to the front plug, and
where necessary these must be extended by means of thermoelement extension cables
Note!
The module is pre-set to the range “10V voltage” range.
9-8
) ±0,05% of
final value
59h Voltage ±4V
FFh
1
-10...10 V= rated range (-10000...10000)
-11, 85 V= min. value before under range (-11850)
two’s complement
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
9
Numeric notation in Siemens S7-format
Analog values are represented as a two’s complement value
Numeric notation:
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
0
Bit 0 ... 7: binary measured value
1
Bit 0 ... 6: binary measured value
Bit 7: sign
0 positive
1 negative
+/- 10V
Voltage
Decimal
Hex
-10V
-27648
9400
-5V
-13824
CA00
0V
0
0
+5V
13824
3600
+10V
+27648
6C00
Formulas for the calculation:
10
U
Value = 27648 •
,
U = Value •
27648
10
U: voltage, Value: decimal value
0...10V
Voltage
Decimal
Hex
0V
0
0000
5V
8192
2000
10V
16384
4000
Formulas for the calculation:
10
U
Value = 16384 •
,
U = Value •
16384
10
U: voltage, Value: decimal value
1...5V
Voltage
Decimal
+1V
0
Hex
0
+3V
+13824
3600
+5V
+27648
6C00
Formulas for the calculation:
4
U-1
Value = 27648•
,
U = Value •
+1
27648
10
U: voltage, Value: decimal value
Chapter 9 Analog input modules
8-9
Analog input modules
+/-4V
Voltage
Decimal
Hex
-4V
-27648
9400
0V
0
0
4V
27648
6C00
Formulas for the calculation:
4
U
Value = 27648 •
,
U = Value •
27648
4
U: voltage, Value: decimal value
+/-400mV
Voltage
Decimal
Hex
-4V
-27648
9400
0V
0
0
4V
27648
6C00
Formulas for the calculation:
400
U
Value = 27648 •
,
U = Value •
27648
400
U: voltage, Value: decimal value
4....20mA
Current
Decimal
+4 mA
0
Hex
0
+12 mA
+13824
3600
+20 mA
+27648
6C00
Formulas for the calculation:
16
I-4
Value = 27648 •
,
I = Value •
+4
27648
16
I: voltage, Value: decimal value
+/- 20mA
Current
Decimal
Hex
-20 mA
-27648
9400
-10 mA
-13824
CA00
0 mA
0
0
+10 mA
+13824
3600
+20 mA
+27648
6C00
Formulas for the calculation:
20
I
,
I = Value •
27648
20
I: voltage, Value: decimal value
Value = 27648 •
9-10
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
9
Measurement data acquisition
During a measurement the data is stored in the data input area. The table
above shows the allocation of the data to a measured value as well as the
respective tolerance.
The following figures show the structure of the data input area:
Data input area:
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
0
High-Byte channel 0
1
Low-Byte channel 0
2
High-Byte channel 1
3
Low-Byte channel 1
4
High-Byte channel 2
5
Low-Byte channel 2
6
High-Byte channel 3
7
Low-Byte channel 3
Note!
Only channels 0 and 2 are used in four-wire systems.
Parameter data
You can configure every channel individually. 10 bytes are available for the
configuration data. Configuration parameters are stored in permanent
memory and they will be retained even if power is turned off.
The following table show the structure of the parameter area:
Parameter area:
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
Default
0
Diagnostic alarm-byte:
Bit 0 ... 5: reserved
Bit 6: 0: diagnostic alarm inhibited
1
reserved
00h
2
Function-no. channel 0 (see table)
2Dh
3
Function-no. channel 1 (see table)
2Dh
4
Function-no. channel 2 (see table)
2Dh
5
Function-no. channel 3 (see table)
2Dh
00h
Bit 7: reserved
6
Option-Byte channel 0
00h
7
Option-Byte channel 1
00h
8
Option-Byte channel 2
00h
9
Option-Byte channel 3
00h
Chapter 9 Analog input modules
8-11
Analog input modules
Parameter
Diagnostic alarm
The diagnostic alarm is enabled by means of bit 6 of byte 0. In this case an
error a 4-byte diagnostic message will be issued to the master system.
Function-no.
Here you must enter the function number of your measurement function for
every channel. The allocation of the function number to a measurement
function is available from the table above.
Option-Byte
Here you can specify the conversion rate. In addition selection and
envelope functions have been implemented.
Note!
Please note that the resolution is reduced when conversion rate are
increased due to the decrease in the integration time.
The format of the data transfer remains the same. The only difference is that
the lower set of bits (LSB’s) lose significance for the analog value.
Structure of the option-byte:
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
6 ... 9
Option-Byte:
Bit 0 ... 3: rate*
0000 15 conversions/s
0001 30 conversions/s
0010 60 conversions/s
0011 123 conversions/s
0100 168 conversions/s
0101 202 conversions/s
0110 3,7 conversions/s
0111 7,5 conversions/s
Resolution
Defaul
00h
16
16
15
14
12
10
16
16
Bit 4 ... 5: Selection function
00 deactivated
01 use 2 of 3 values
10 use 4 of 6 values
Bit 6 ... 7: Envelope function
00 deactivated
01 envelope ± 8
10 envelope ±16
*) These specifications apply to 1-channel operation. For multi-channel operations the
conversion rate per channel can be calculated by dividing the specified conversion rate by
the number of active channels.
9-12
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
9
Diagnostic data
When you enable alarms in byte 0 of the parameter area, modules will
transfer 4 diagnostic bytes with pre-defined contents to your master when
an error is detected. Please note that analogue modules only use the first
two bytes for diagnostic purposes. The remaining bytes are not used.
The structure of the diagnostic bytes is as follows:
Diagnostic data:
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
Default
0
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
0: Module malfunction
1: constant 0
2: external error
3: channel error present
4 ... 7: reserved
1
Bit 0 ... 3 class of module
-
-
0101 analog module
Bit 4: channel information available
2
not assigned
-
3
not assigned
-
Technical data
Electrical data
ADAM 8231-1BD52
Number of inputs
4 differential inputs
Input resistance
inductive:10 M (voltage range)
capacitive:100 K(voltage range)
50Ω (current range)
Power supply
5 V via back panel bus
Current consumption
240 mA via back panel bus
Isolation w.r.t. back panel bus
yes, isolation tested to 500 Vrms
Status indicators
via LED’s on the front
Programming specifications
Input data
8 Bytes (1 word per channel)
Output data
-
Parameter data
10 Bytes
Diagnostic data
4 Bytes
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (W x H x D)
25, 4 x 76 x 76 mm
Weight
100 g
Chapter 9 Analog input modules
8-13
Analog input modules
AI 4x12Bit, 4 ... 20mA, isolated
Ordering details
AI 4x12Bit, 4...20mA, isolated ADAM 8231-1BD60
Description
The module has 4 inputs that are permanently configured to measure
current signals (4 ... 20 mA). This module requires a total of 8 bytes of the
process image for the input data (2 bytes per channel) and it is configured
by means of 1 byte containing parameter specifications. The measured
values are returned in S5-format. DC/DC converters and isolation amplifiers
are employed to provide electrical isolation for the channels of the module
with respect to the back panel bus and between the different channels.
Properties
• 4 inputs, channels isolated from the back panel bus and from each other
• Permanently configured for current measurements
• Suitable for transducers with 4 ... 20mA outputs
• LED’s to indicate open circuit connections
• Galvanic isolation of the channels by means of isolation amplifiers
Construction
Status indicators Connector assignment
LED
+0
+1
+2
+3
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Description
LED (red)
open circuit detection
This LED’s is turned on
when the transducer is
disconnected.
ADAM 8231-1BD60
9-14
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Assignment
pos. connection K.0
Channel 0 common
pos. connection K.1
Channel 1 common
pos. connection K.2
Channel 2 common
pos. connection K.3
Channel 3 common
Chapter
9
Wiring diagram and schematic
Wiring diagram
Schematic diagram
Configuration
The module is configured by means of one byte of parameter data.
Parameter data:
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
Bit 6: 0: open circuit detection off
1: open circuit detection on
0
Numeric notation
Input data is stored in a word in Siemens S5-format. The word contains the
binary value and information bits:
Numeric notation:
Byte
0
1
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
Bit 0:
overflow bit
0: value located within measuring range
1: measuring range exceeded
Bit 1:
error bit (set by internal errors)
Bit 2:
activity bit (always 0)
Bit 3...7: binary measured value (see table below)
Bit 0...6: binary measured value (see table below)
Bit 7:
sign
0 positive
1 negative
The following table shows the allocation of binary values to the respective
measured values.
Chapter 9 Analog input modules
8-15
Analog input modules
Numeric notation in Siemens S5- format
Measured value in mA
Units
Binary measured value
T E Ü
Range
24,0
2560
0101000000000
0 0 0
over range occurs
20,016
2049
0100000000001
0 0 0
20,0
2048
0100000000000
0 0 0
19,98
2047
0011111111111
0 0 0
12,0
1024
0010000000000
0 0 0
8,0
512
0001000000000
0 0 0
6,0
256
0000100000000
0 0 0
5,0
128
0000010000000
0 0 0
4,016
2
0000000000010
0 0 0
0 0 0
4,008
1
0000000000001
4
0
0000000000000
0 0 0
3,984
-2
1111111111110
0 0 0
3,0
-128
1111110000000
0 0 0
2,0
-256
1111100000000
0 0 0
1,0
-384
1111010000000
0 0 0
0,0
-512
1111000000000
0 0 0
rated range
Under range
Technical data
Electrical data
ADAM 8231-1BD60
Number of inputs
4 individually isolated
Current measuring range
4 ... 20 mA
Input filter time delay
3 ms
Input resistance
20
Power supply
5 V via back panel bus
Current consumption
250 mA via back panel bus
Isolation
yes, every channel separately, isolation tested at 500 Vrms
Status indicators
via LED’s on the front
Programming specifications
Input data
8 Bytes (1 word per channel)
Output data
-
Parameter data
1 Byte
Diagnostic data
4 Byte
Dimensions and weight
9-16
Dimensions (W x H x D)
25, 4 x 76 x 76 mm
Weight
120 g
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Analog output modules
10
Analog output modules
Overview
This chapter contains a description of the construction and the operation of
the Advantech analog output modules.
Below follows a description of:
• A system overview of the analog output modules
• Properties
• Constructions
• Interfacing and schematic diagram
• Technical data
System overview
Output modules SM 232
Here follows a summary of the analog output modules that are currently
available from Advantech:
Ordering details output modules
10-2
Type
Order number
AO4x12Bit, multi-output
ADAM 8232-1BD50
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
10
General
Cabling for analog signals
You should only use screened twisted pair cable when you are connecting
analogue signals. These cables reduce the effect of electrical interference.
The screen of the analogue signal cable should be grounded at both ends.
In situations where the equipment at the being connected by the cable is at
different electrical potentials it is possible that a current will flow to equalize
the potential difference. This current could interfere with the analog signals.
Under these circumstances it is advisable to ground the screen of the signal
cable at one end only.
Connecting loads and actuators
Due to the fact that actuators also require a source of external power they
may also be connected to actuators by means of 2 wires or 4 wires. Where
control signals are supplied to 2-wire-actuators a power supply must be
connected in series with the control cable. 4-wire actuators are connected to
an external power source.
Note!
Please ensure that you connect actuators to the correct polarity! Unused
output terminals must not be connected!
Chapter 10 Analog output modules
10-3
Analog output modules
AO 4x12Bit, Multi-Output
Ordering details
AO 4x12Bit Multi-Output
ADAM 8232-1BD50
Description
This module provides 4 outputs that can be configured individually. The
module occupies a total of 8 bytes of output data (2 bytes per channel) in
the process image. These values must be defined as left justified two’s
complement entries.
Galvanic isolation between the channels on the module and the back panel
bus is provided by means of DC/DC converters and optocouplers. The
module requires an external supply of 24V DC.
Properties
• 4 outputs with common ground
• Outputs with individually configurable functions
• Suitable for connection to actuators requiring ±10V, 1 ... 5V, 0 … 10V,
±20mA, 4 … 20mA or 0 ... 20mA inputs
• Diagnostic LED and diagnostic function
Construction
Status indicator Connector assignment
LED
M3
Description
Diagnostic LED (red)
turned on by:
- a short circuit is
detected at the control
voltage output
- an open circuit is
detected on the current
output line
- the CPU is in STOP
mode
- the bus coupler does not
receive supply voltage
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Assignment
24 VDC supply voltage
+ Channel 0
Channel 0 common
+ Channel 1
Channel 1 common
+ Channel 2
Channel 2 common
+ Channel 3
Channel 3 common
Supply voltage common
ADAM 8232-1BD50
Note!
Please note that the diagnostic LED’s of the entire module are denoted M3!
10-4
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
10
Wiring diagram and schematic
Wiring diagram
Schematic diagram
Function no. allocation
No.
Function
Output range
Tolerance
00h no output
1
01h Voltage ±10 V
Siemens S5-format
±11,85 V
12, 5 V = max. value before over range occurs (20480)
-10...10 V = rated range (-16384...16384)
-12, 5 V = min. value before under range (-20480)
02h Voltage 1...5 V
Siemens S5-format
0...6 V
6 V = max. value before over range occurs (20480)
1...5 V = rated range (0...16384)
0 V = min. value before under range (-4096)
05h Voltage 0...10 V
Siemens S5-format
0...12, 5 V
12, 5 V = max. value before over range occurs (20480)
0...10 V = rated range (0...16384)
09h Voltage ±10 V
Siemens S7-format
(two’s complement)
±11, 85 V
11, 85 V= max. value before over range occurs (32767)
-10 V...10 V = rated range (-27648...27648)
-11,85 = min. value before under range (-32767)
1
0Ah Voltage 1...5 V
Siemens S7-format
(two’s complement)
0...5, 75 V
5, 75 V = max. value before over range occurs (32767)
1...5 V = rated range (0...27648)
0 V = min. value before under range (-6912)
1
0Dh Voltage 0...10 V
Siemens S7-format
(two’s complement)
0...11, 5 V
11, 5 V = max. value before over range occurs (32767)
0...10 V = rated range (0...27648)
no under range available
1
) ±0,2%
of final value
) ±0,2% of
final value
1
) ±0,05% of
final value
1
) ±0,2% of
final value
) ±0,05% of
final value
) ±0,05%of
final value
Chapter 10 Analog output modules
10-5
Analog output modules
No.
Function
Output range
±23,70 mA
23,70mA = max. value before over range occurs (20480)
20...20 mA = rated range (-16384...16384)
-23, 70 mA = min. value before under range (-20480)
1
04h Current 4...20 mA
Siemens S5-format
0...23, 70 mA
23, 70 mA = max. value before over range occurs (20480)
4...20 mA = rated range (0...16384)
0 mA = min. value before under range (-4096)
1
06h Current 0...20 mA
Siemens S5-format
0...23, 70 mA
23, 70 mA = max. value before over range occurs (20480)
0...20 mA = rated range (0...16384)
no under range available
1
0Bh Current ±20 mA
Siemens S7-format
(two’s complement)
±23, 70 mA
23, 70 mA = max. value before over range occurs (32767)
-20...20mA = rated range (-27648...27648)
-23, 70 mA = min. value before under range (-32767)
1
0Ch Current 4...20 mA
Siemens S7-format
(two’s complement)
0...22, 96 mA
22, 96 mA = max. value before over range occurs (32767)
4...20 mA = rated range (0...27648)
0 mA = min. value before under range (-5530)
1
0Eh Current 0...2 0mA
Siemens S7-format
(two’s complement)
0...22, 96 mA
22, 96 mA = max. value before over range occurs (32767)
0...20 mA = rated range (0...27648)
no under range available
1)determined at an ambient temp. of 25°C, conversion rate of 15/s
10-6
Tolerance
03h Current ±20 mA
Siemens S5-format
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
) ±0,2% of
final value
) ±0,2% of
final value
) ±0,2% of
final value
) ±0,05% of
final value
) ±0,05% of
final value
1
) ±0,2% of
final value
Chapter
10
Numeric notation in Siemens S5 format
Input data is saved into a word in Siemens S5-format. The word consists of
the binary value and the information bits.
Numeric notation:
Byte
0
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
Bit 0:
Bit 1:
overflow bit
0: value located within measuring range
1: measuring range exceeded
error bit (set by internal errors)
Bit 2:
activity bit (always 0)
Bit 3...7: binary measured value
1
Bit 0...6: binary measured value
Bit 7:
sign
0 positive
1 negative
+/- 10V
Voltage
Decimal
Hex
-10V
-16384
C000
-5V
-8192
E000
0V
0
0
+5V
8192
2000
+10V
+16384
4000
Formulas for the calculation:
10
U
Value = 16384 •
,
U = Value •
16384
10
U: voltage, Value: decimal value
0...10V
Voltage
Decimal
Hex
0V
0
0000
5V
8192
2000
10 V
16384
4000
Formulas for the calculation:
10
U
Value = 16384 •
,
U = Value •
16384
10
U: voltage, Value: decimal value
Chapter 10 Analog output modules
10-7
Analog output modules
1...5V
Voltage
Decimal
+1 V
0
Hex
0
+3 V
+8192
2000
+5 V
+16384
4000
Formulas for the calculation:
4
U-1
Value = 16384 •
,
U = Value •
+1
16384
4
U: voltage, Value: decimal value
4....20mA
Current
Decimal
+4 mA
0
Hex
0
+12 mA
+8192
2000
+20 mA
+16384
4000
Formulas for the calculation:
16
I-4
Value = 16384 •
,
I = Value •
+4
16384
16
I: current, Value: decimal value
+/- 20mA
Current
Decimal
Hex
-20 mA
-16384
C000
-10 mA
-8192
E000
0 mA
0
0
+10 mA
+8192
2000
+20 mA
+16384
4000
Formulas for the calculation:
16
I-4
Value = 16384 •
,
I = Value •
+4
16384
16
I: current, Value: decimal value
10-8
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
10
Siemens S7-format
The analog values is represented in two’s complement format.
Numeric representation:
Byte
0
1
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
Bit 0...7: binary measured vale
Bit 0...6: binary measured vale
Bit 7:
sign
0 positive
1 negative
+/- 10V
Voltage
Hex
-10V
-27648
9400
-5V
-13824
CA00
0V
0
0
+5V
13824
3600
+10V
+27648
6C00
Formulas for the calculation:
10
U
Value = 27648 •
,
U = Value •
27648
10
U: voltage, Value: decimal value
0...10V
Voltage
Decimal
Hex
0V
0
0000
5V
8192
2000
10 V
16384
4000
Formulas for the calculation:
10
U
Value = 16384 •
,
U = Value •
16384
10
U: voltage, Value: decimal value
1...5V
Voltage
Decimal
+1 V
0
Hex
0
+3 V
+13824
3600
+5 V
+27648
6C00
Formulas for the calculation:
4
U-1
Value = 27648 •
,
U = Value •
+1
27648
4
U: voltage, Value: decimal value
Chapter 10 Analog output modules
10-9
Analog output modules
+/-4V
Voltage
Decimal
Hex
-4V
-27648
9400
0V
0
0
4V
27648
6C00
Formulas for the calculation:
4
U
Value = 27648 •
,
U = Value •
27648
4
U: voltage, Value: decimal value
+/-400mV
Voltage
Decimal
Hex
-400 mV
-27648
9400
0V
0
0
400 mV
27648
6C00
Formulas for the calculation:
400
U
Value = 27648 •
,
U = Value •
27648
400
U: voltage, Value: decimal value
4....20mA
Current
Decimal
+4 mA
0
Hex
0
+12 mA
+13824
3600
+20 mA
+27648
6C00
Formulas for the calculation:
16
I-4
Value = 27648 •
,
I = Value •
+4
27648
16
I: voltage, Value: decimal value
+/- 20mA
Current
Decimal
Hex
-20 mA
-27648
9400
-10 mA
-13824
CA00
0 mA
0
0
+10 mA
+13824
3600
+20 mA
+27648
6C00
Formulas for the calculation:
20
I
,
I = Value •
27648
20
I: voltage, Value: decimal value
Value = 27648 •
10-10 ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
10
Data output
The value of the output data must be entered into the data output area. For
every channel you can configure the relationship between the output value
and the respective current or voltage by means of a function no..
The following table shows the structure of the data output area:
Data output area:
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
0
High-Byte channel 0
1
Low-Byte channel 0
2
High-Byte channel 1
3
Low-Byte channel 1
4
High-Byte channel 2
5
Low-Byte channel 2
6
High-Byte channel 3
7
Low-Byte channel 3
Configuration
6 bytes of parameter data are available for the configuration data. These
parameters are stored in non-volatile memory and are available after the unit
has been powered off.
The following table shows the structure of the parameter data:
Parameter area:
Byte
0
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
Diagnostic alarm byte:
Bit 0...5: reserved
Bit 6:
Bit 7:
0: diagnostic alarm inhibited
1: diagnostic alarm enabled
reserved
1
reserved
2
Function-no. channel 0
3
Function-no. channel 1
4
Function-no. channel 2
5
Function-no. channel 3
Chapter 10 Analog output modules
10-11
Analog output modules
Parameter
Diagnostic alarm
You can enable diagnostic alarms by means of bit 6 of byte 0. When an error
occurs 4 diagnostic bytes are transmitted to the master system.
Function-no.
Here you must enter the function no. of the output function for every
channel. The relationship between the function-number and the output
functions is available from the function-no. allocation table.
Diagnostic data
When you enable alarms in byte 0 of the parameter area, modules will
transfer 4 diagnostic bytes with pre-defined contents to your master when
an error is detected. Please note that analogue modules only use the first
two bytes for diagnostic purposes. The remaining bytes are not used.
The structure of the diagnostic bytes is as follows:
Diagnostic data:
Byte
0
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
Bit 0:
Module malfunction
Bit 1:
Constant 0
Bit 2:
External error
Bit 3:
Channel error present
Default
-
Bit 4...7: reserved
1
Bit 0...3
Bit 4:
class of module
0101 analog module
channel information available
-
2
not assigned
-
3
not assigned
-
10-12 ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
10
Technical data
Electrical data
ADAM 8232-1BD50
Number of outputs
4
Voltage range
±10 V, 1 ... 5 V, 0 ... 10 V
Current range
±20 mA, 4 ... 20 mA, 0 ... 20 mA
Actuator resistance
min. 500 (voltage range)
max. 500 (current range)
Short circuit current
30 mA
Power supply
5 V via back panel bus 24 V
±20% externally
Current consumption
via back panel bus: 20 mA
24 VDC externally: 200 mA
Isolation
500 Vrms (field voltage - back panel bus)
Status indicators
via LED’s on the front
Programming specifications
Input data
-
Output data
8 Byte (1 word per channel)
Parameter data
6 Byte
Diagnostic data
4 Byte
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (W x H x D)
25, 4 x 76 x 76 mm
Weight
100 g
Chapter 10 Analog output modules
10-13
Analog output modules
10-14 ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Analog input/output
module
11
Analog input/output module
Overview
This chapter contains a description of the construction and the operation of
the Advantech analog input/output modules.
Below follows a description of:
• A system overview of the analog input/output modules
• Properties
• Construction
• Wiring and schematic diagram
• Configuration data
• Function number allocation
• Technical data
11-2
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
11
System overview
Input/output modules SM 234
Here follows a summary of the analog input/output modules that are
currently available from Advantech
ADAM 8234-1BD50
Ordering details input/output modules
Type
Order number
AIO2x12Bit, Multi In/Output
ADAM 8234-1BD50
Chapter 11 Analog input/output module
11-3
Analog input/output module
General
Cabling for analog signals
You should only use screened twisted pair cable when you are connecting
analogue signals. These cables reduce the effect of electrical interference.
The screen of the analogue signal cable should be grounded at both ends.
In situations where the equipment at the being connected by the cable is at
different electrical potentials it is possible that a current will flow to equalize
the potential difference. This current could interfere with the analog signals.
Under these circumstances it is advisable to ground the screen of the signal
cable at one end only.
Connecting transducers
Our analogue modules provide a large number of configuration options
suitable for 2-wire and 4-wire transducers. Please remember that transducers
require an external power source. You must connect an external power
supply in line with any 2-wire transducer. The following diagram explains
the connection of 2- and 4-wire transducers:
2-Wire interfacing
1
2
3
2
DC 24V
-
+
4
5
DC 24V
-
+
transducer 1
4 ... 20mA
transducer 2
4 ... 20mA
6
7
transducer 1
3
4 ... 20mA
DC 24V
4
transducer 2
5
4 ... 20mA
DC 24V
6
DC 24V
-
+
transducer 3
trans ducer 3
4 ... 20mA
8
9
4- Wire interfacing
1
7
4 ... 20mA
DC 24V
8
DC 24V
-
+
trans ducer 4
transducer 4
4 ... 20mA
10
9
4 ... 20mA
DC 24V
10
Connecting loads and actuators
Due to the fact that actuators also require a source of external power they
may also be connected to actuators by means of 2 wires or 4 wires. Where
control signals are supplied to 2-wire-actuators a power supply must be
connected in series with the control cable. 4-wire actuators are connected to
an external power source.
Note!
Please ensure that you connect actuators to the correct polarity! Unused
output terminals must not be connected!
11-4
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
11
AI2/AO2 x12Bit, Multi In/Output
Ordering details
AI2/AO2x12Bit Multi-In/Output
ADAM 8234-1BD50
Description
This module has 2 analog inputs and 2 analog that can be configured
individually. The module occupies a total of 4 bytes of input and 4 bytes of
output data.
Galvanic isolation between the channels on the module and the back panel
bus is provided by means of DC/DC converters and optocouplers. The
module requires an external supply of 24 VDC.
Properties
• 2 inputs and 2 outputs with common ground
• Outputs with individually configurable functions
• Suitable for connection to transducers and actuators with ±10 V, 1 ... 5 V,
0 ... 10 V, ±20 mA or 4 ... 20 mA inputs or outputs
• Diagnostic LED
• Input/output ranges: current: -20 ... 0 .. 4 ... 20 mA
voltage: -10 ... 0 .. 1 ... 5 ... 10 V
Construction
Status indicator Connector assignment
LED
Description
Diagnostic LED (red)
turned on by:
a short circuit is detected
at the control voltage
output
an open circuit is detected
on the current output line
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Assignment
24 VDC supply voltage
pos. connection E.0
Channel 0 common
pos. connection E.1
Channel 1 common
pos. connection A.2
Channel 2 common
pos. connection A.3
Channel 3 common
Supply voltage common
ADAM 8234-1BD50
Chapter 11 Analog input/output module
11-5
Analog input/output module
Wiring diagram and schematic
Wiring diagram
Schematic diagram
Function no. allocation
No.
11-6
Function
Output or input range
Tolerance
1
01h Voltage ±10 V
Siemens S5-format
±11, 85 V
12, 5 V = max. value before over range occurs (20480)
-10...10 V = rated range (-16384...16384)
-12, 5 V = min. value before under range (-20480)
02h Voltage 1...5 V
Siemens S5-format
0...6 V
6 V = max. value before over range occurs (20480)
1...5 V = rated range (0...16384)
0 V = min. value before under range (-4096)
05h Voltage 0...10 V
Siemens S5-format
0...12, 5 V
12, 5 V = max. value before over range occurs (20480)
0...10 V = rated range (0...16384)
no under range available
09h Voltage ±10 V
Siemens S7-format
(two’s complement)
±11, 85 V
11, 85 V= max. value before over range occurs (32767)
-10 V...10 V = rated range (-27648...27648)
-11, 85 = min. value before under range (-32767)
1
0Ah Voltage 1...5 V
Siemens S7-format
(two’s complement)
0...5, 75 V
5, 75 V = max. value before over range occurs (32767)
1...5 V = rated range (0...27648)
0 V = min. value before under range (-6912)
1
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
) ±0,2% of
final value
1
) ±0,05% of
final value
1
) ±0,2% of
final value
) ±0,05% of
final value
) ±0,05% of
final valu
Chapter
No.
Function
Output or input range
11
Tolerance
0Dh Voltage 0...10 V
Siemens S7-format
(two’s complement)
0...11, 5 V
11, 5 V = max. value before over range occurs (32767)
0...10 V = rated range (0...27648)
no under range available
1
03h Current ±20 mA
Siemens S5-format
±23, 70 mA
23, 70 mA = max. value before over range occurs (20480)
-20...20 mA = rated range (-16384...16384)
-23, 70 mA = min. value before under range (-20480)
1
04h Current 4...20 mA
Siemens S5-format
0...23, 70 mA
23, 70 mA = max. value before over range occurs (20480)
4...20 mA = rated range (0...16384)
0 mA = min. value before under range (-4096)
1
06h Current 0...20 mA
Siemens S5-format
0...23, 70 mA
23, 70 mA = max. value before over range occurs (20480)
0...20 mA = rated range (0...16384)
no under range available
1
0Bh Current ±20 mA
Siemens S7-format
(two’s complement)
±23, 70 mA
23, 70 mA = max. value before over range occurs (32767)
-20...20 mA = rated range (-27648...27648)
-23, 70 mA = min. value before under range (-32767)
1
0Ch Current 4...20mA
Siemens S7-format
(two’s complement)
0...22, 96 mA
22, 96 mA = max. value before over range occurs (32767)
4...20 mA = rated range (0...27648)
0 mA = min. value before under range (-5530)
1
0Eh Current 0...20mA
Siemens S7-format
(two’s complement)
0...22, 96 mA
22, 96 mA = max. value before over range occurs (32767)
0...20 mA = rated range (0...27648) no under range available
) ±0,2% of
final value
) ±0,2% of
final value
) ±0,2% of
final value
) ±0,2% of
final value
) ±0,05% of
final value
) ±0,05% of
final value
1
) ±0,2% of
final value
1) determined at an ambient temp. of 25°C, conversion rate of 15/s, selection and envelope
function turned off.
Chapter 11 Analog input/output module
11-7
Analog input/output module
Numeric notation in Siemens S5-format
Input data is saved into a word in Siemens S5-format. The word consists of
the binary value and the information bits.
Numeric notation:
Byte
0
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
Bit 0:
Bit 1:
overflow bit
0: value located within measuring range
1: measuring range exceede
error bit (set by internal errors)
Bit 2:
activity bit (always 0)
Bit 3...7: binary measured value
1
Bit 0...6: binary measured value
Bit 7:
sign
0 positive
1 negative
+/- 10V
Voltage
Decimal
Hex
-10 V
-16384
C000
-5 V
-8192
E000
0V
0
0
+5 V
8192
2000
+10 V
+16384
4000
Formulas for the calculation:
10
U
Value = 16384 •
,
U = Value •
16384
10
U: voltage, Value: decimal value
0...10V
Voltage
Decimal
Hex
0V
0
0000
5V
8192
2000
10 V
16384
4000
Formulas for the calculation:
10
U
Value = 16384 •
,
U = Value •
16384
10
U: voltage, Value: decimal value
11-8
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
11
1...5V
Voltage
Decimal
+1 V
0
Hex
0
+3 V
+8192
2000
+5 V
+16384
4000
Formulas for the calculation:
4
U-1
Value = 16384 •
,
U = Value •
+1
16384
4
U: voltage, Value: decimal value
4....20mA
Current
Decimal
+4 mA
0
Hex
0
+12 mA
+8192
2000
+20 mA
+16384
4000
Formulas for the calculation:
16
I-4
Value = 16384 •
,
I = Value •
+4
16384
16
U: voltage, Value: decimal value
+/- 20mA
Current
Decimal
Hex
-20 mA
-16384
C000
-10 mA
-8192
E000
0 mA
0
0
+10 mA
+8192
2000
+20 mA
+16384
4000
Formulas for the calculation:
20
I
Value = 16384 •
,
I = Value •
16384
20
U: voltage, Value: decimal value
Chapter 11 Analog input/output module
11-9
Analog input/output module
Siemens S7-format
The analog values are represented in two’s complement format.
Numeric representation:
Byte
0
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
Bit 0...7: binary measured vale
Bit 0...6: binary measured vale
Bit 7:
1
sign
0 positive
1 negative
+/- 10V
Voltage
Decimal
Hex
-10 V
-27648
9400
-5 V
-13824
CA00
0V
0
0
+5 V
13824
3600
+10 V
+27648
6C00
Formulas for the calculation:
10
U
Value = 27648 •
,
U = Value •
27648
10
U: voltage, Value: decimal value
0...10V
Voltage
Decimal
Hex
0V
0
0000
5V
8192
2000
10 V
16384
4000
Formulas for the calculation:
10
U
Value = 16384 •
,
U = Value •
16384
10
U: voltage, Value: decimal value
1...5V
Voltage
Decimal
+1 V
0
Hex
0
+3 V
+13824
3600
+5 V
+27648
6C00
Formulas for the calculation:
4
U-1
Value = 27648 •
,
U = Value •
+1
27648
4
U: voltage, Value: decimal value
11-10 ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
11
+/-4V
Voltage
Decimal
Hex
-4 V
-27648
9400
0V
0
0
4V
27648
6C00
Formulas for the calculation:
4
U
Value = 27648 •
,
U = Value •
27648
4
U: voltage, Value: decimal value
+/-400mV
Voltage
Decimal
Hex
-400 mV
-27648
9400
0V
0
0
400 mV
27648
6C00
Formulas for the calculation:
400
U
Value = 27648 •
,
U = Value •
27648
400
U: voltage, Value: decimal value
4....20mA
Current
Decimal
+4 mA
0
Hex
0
+12 mA
+13824
3600
+20 mA
+27648
6C00
Formulas for the calculation:
16
I-4
Value = 27648 •
,
I = Value •
+4
27648
16
I: voltage, Value: decimal value
+/- 20mA
Current
Decimal
Hex
-20 mA
-27648
9400
-10 mA
-13824
CA00
0 mA
0
0
+10 mA
+13824
3600
+20 mA
+27648
6C00
Formulas for the calculation:
20
I
Value = 27648 •
,
I = Value •
27648
20
I: voltage, Value: decimal value
Chapter 11 Analog input/output module
11-11
Analog input/output module
Data output
The following table shows the structure of the data input and output area:
Data input area /Data output area:
Byte
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
0
High-Byte channel 0
1
Low-Byte channel 0
2
High-Byte channel 1
3
Low-Byte channel 1
4
High-Byte channel 2
5
Low-Byte channel 2
6
High-Byte channel 3
7
Low-Byte channel 3
Configuration
6 bytes of parameter data are available for the configuration data. These
parameters are stored in non-volatile memory and are available after the unit
has been powered off.
The following table shows the structure of the parameter data:
Parameter area:
Byte
0
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
Diagnostic alarm byte:
Bit 0...5: reserved
Bit 6:
Bit 7:
0: diagnostic alarm inhibited
1: diagnostic alarm enabled
reserved
1
reserved
2
Bit 0...3: Function-no. channel 0
00h: no output
01h ... 0Eh: see table
Bit 4...7: reserved always at 0000
3
Bit 0...3: Function-no. channel 1
00h: no output
01h ... 0Eh: see table
Bit 4...7: reserved always at 0000
4
Bit 0...3: Function-no. channel 2
00h: no output
01h ... 0Eh: see table
Bit 4...7: reserved always at 0000
5
Bit 0...3: Function-no. channel 3
00h: no output
01h ... 0Eh: see table
Bit 4...7: reserved always at 0000
11-12 ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
11
Parameter
Diagnostic alarm
You can enable diagnostic alarms by means of bit 6 of byte 0. When an error
occurs 4 diagnostic bytes are transmitted to the master system.
Function-no.
Here you must enter the function no. of the output function for every
channel. The relationship between the function-number and the output
functions is available from the function-no. allocation table.
Diagnostic data
When you enable alarms in byte 0 of the parameter area, modules will
transfer 4 diagnostic bytes with pre-defined contents to your master when
an error is detected. Please note that analogue modules only use the first
two bytes for diagnostic purposes. The remaining bytes are not used.
The structure of the diagnostic bytes is as follows:
Diagnostic data:
Byte
0
Bit 0:
Bit 7 ... Bit 0
Module malfunction
Bit 1:
Constant 0
Bit 2:
External error
Bit 3:
Channel error present
Default
-
Bit 4...7: reserved
1
Bit 0...3
Bit 4:
2
3
class of module
0101 analog module
channel information availabl
-
not assigned
-
not assigned
-
Chapter 11 Analog input/output module
11-13
Analog input/output module
Technical data
Electrical data
ADAM 8234-1BD50
Number of inputs/outputs
2/2
Voltage range
±10 V, 1 ... 5 V, 0 ... 10 V
Current range
±20 mA, 4 ... 20 mA, 0 ... 20 mA
Input resistance
100 Ω (voltage range)
50 Ω (current range)
Actuator resistance (for outputs)
min. 500 Ω (voltage range)
max. 500 Ω (current range)
Short circuit current
30 mA
Power supply
5 V via back panel bus
24 V ±20% externally
Current consumption
via back panel bus: 20 mA
24 VDC externally: 100 mA
Isolation
500 Vrms (field voltage - back panel bus)
Status indicators
via LED’s on the front
Programming specifications
Input data
4 Byte (1 word per channel)
Output data
4 Byte (1 word per channel)
Parameter data
6 Byte
Diagnostic data
4 Byte
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (W x H x D)
25, 4 x 76 x 76 mm
Weight
100 g
11-14 ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
System expansion
modules
12
System expansion modules
Overview
The chapter contains a description of additional components and accessories that are available from Advantech for the ADAM-8000.
A general overview is followed by the description of the bus expansion
module that can be used to split a single ADAM-8000 row over up to 4
rows.
The chapter concludes with the terminal modules. These modules provide
connection facilities for signaling cables as well as supply voltages for your
ADAM-8000.
Below follows a description of:
• System overview of additional components
• Bus expansion with IM 260
• Terminal module CM 201
12-2
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
12
System overview
Bus expansion
Ordering details Bus expansion
Type
Order number
Description
IM 260
VIPA 260-1AA00
Basic interface row 1
Cable 0, 5 m
VIPA 260-1XY05
Interconnecting cable, 0, 5 m length
Cable 1 m
VIPA 260-1XY10
Interconnecting cable, 1 m length
Cable 1, 5 m
VIPA 260-1XY15
Interconnecting cable, 1, 5 m length
Cable 2 m
VIPA 260-1XY20
Interconnecting cable, 2 m length
Cable 2, 5 m
VIPA 260-1XY25
Interconnecting cable, 2, 5 m length
Terminal module
Ordering details Terminal module
Type
Order number
Description
CM 201
VIPA 201-1AA20
Dual terminals red/blue
Chapter 12 System expamsion modules
12-3
System expansion modules
Bus expansion IM 260
The system consisting of IM 260 and interconnecting cables is an expansion option that you can use to split the ADAM-8000 over up to 4 rows.
This system can only be installed in a centralized ADAM-8000 where a PC
288 or a CPU is employed as the master station! For bus expansion purposes you must always include the basic interface
IM 260. The basic interface can then be connected to up to 3 additional
ADAM-8000 rows by means of the appropriate interconnecting cables for
rows.
Please note!
Certain rules and regulations must be observed when the bus expansion
modules are being employed:
• The system caters foe a maximum of 4 rows.
• Every row can carry a maximum of 16 peripheral modules.
• The max. total quantity of 32 peripheral modules must not be exceeded.
• In critical environments the total length of interconnecting cables
should not exceed a max. of 2m.
• Every row can derive a max. current of 1.5A from the back panel bus,
while the total current is limited to 4A.
• A peripheral module must be installed next to the IM 260 basic interface!
12-4
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
12
Construction
The following figure shows the construction of a bus expansion under
observance of the installation requirements and rules:
CPU / PC
IM 260
Peripheral
Module
Peripheral
Module
PeripherieModul
1
IM 261
Peripheral
Module
m +1
IM 261
......
with m
16
Addressing
s equence
m +n
with n
16
with o
16
with p
16
Peripheral
Module
......
Peripheral
Module
m+n+o+
1
m
Peripheral
Module
Peripheral
Module
m+n+1
IM 261
......
m+n+o
Peripheral
Module
......
W here: m + n + o+ p
m+n+o+
p
32
Note!
The bus expansion must only be used in conjunction a CPU (combi-CPU’s
are also permitted)!
The bus expansion module is supported as of the following minimum
firmware revision levels:
from Version 2.07
CPU compatible with Siemens STEP® 5:
CPU compatible with Siemens STEP® 7:
from Version 1.0
CPU for IEC1131: from Version 1.0
Chapter 12 System expamsion modules
12-5
System expansion modules
Status indicator Basic interface IM 260
LED
Color
Description
PW
yellow
Supply voltage available
P8
yellow
Supply voltage for subsequent rows is active
EN
yellow
Back panel bus communications active
Status indicator row interface IM 261
LED
Color
Description
PW
yellow
Supply voltage available via IM 260
EN
yellow
Back panel bus communications active
BA
red
Outputs inhibited (BASP) is active
Technical data
Electrical data
ADAM8260-1AA00
Power supply
24 VDC via front
Current consumption
1, 9 A
Currentconsumption back panel bus
30 mA
Power supply back panel bus an IM 261
-
max. cable distance betw. 1st. and last row
2,5m
Dimensions and weight
12-6
Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm
25, 4 x 76 x 76
Weight
80 g
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
12
Terminal module CM 201
2xX 11 Pole
The terminal module is available under order no.: ADAM8201-1AA20.
This module is a complementary module providing 2 or 3 wire connection
facilities. The module is not connected to the system bus.
Properties
• 2 separate rows of 11 electrically interconnected terminals.
• No connection to the system bus.
• Maximum terminal current 10 A.
Construction and schematic diagram
Construction
Description
Schematic diagram
ADAM8201-1A
Technical data
Electrical data
ADAM8201-1AA20
Number of rows
2
Number of terminals per row
11
Maximum terminal current
10 A
Terminal color
red/blue
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm
25, 4 x 76 x 76
Weight
50 g
Chapter 12 System expamsion modules
12-7
System expansion modules
12-8
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Assembly and installation
guidelines
13
Assembly and installation guidelines
Overview
This chapter contains the information required to assemble and wire a
controller consisting of ADAM-8000 components.
Below follows a description of:
• a general summary of the components
• steps required for the assembly and for wiring
• EMC-guidelines for assembling the ADAM-8000
Overview
General
The modules are installed on a carrier rail. A bus connector provides
interconnections between the modules. This bus connector links the
modules via the back panel bus of the modules and it is placed into the Trail that carries the modules.
The back panel bus connector is isolated and available from VIPA in width
of 1-, 2-, 4- or 8-connections.
You can use the following standard 35 mm T-rails to mount the ADAM-8000
modules:
T-rail
Bus connector
ADAM-8000 modules communicate via a back panel bus connector. This
back panel bus connector is available in versions of 1-, 2-, 4- and 8- connections.
13-2
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
13
The following figure shows a 1-connector and a 4-connector bus:
The bus connector is isolated and must be inserted into the T-rail until it
clips in its place and the bus-connections protrude from the rail.
Ordering data
Type
Order number
Description
Bus connector
ADAM8290-0AA10
Bus connector 1-connection
Bus connector
ADAM8290-0AA20
Bus connector 2-connection
Bus connector
ADAM8290-0AA40
Bus connector 4-connection
Bus connector
ADAM8290-0AA80
Bus connector 8-connection
Chapter 13 Assembly and installation guidelines
13-3
Assembly and installation guidelines
T-rail installation
The following figure shows the installation of a 4-connector bus connector
in a T-rail and the plug-in locations for the modules.
The different plug-in locations are defined by the guide rails.
1
2
[1]
3
[2]
[3]
[4]
4
SM 221
IM 253 CAN
.0
2
.0
2
.0
2
3
.1
3
.1
3
.1
3
BA
.2
01
RN
BA
VIP A 288-2B L10
13-4
.2
4
.2
4
.2
4
5
.3
5
.3
5
.3
5
.4
6
.4
6
.4
6
.4
6
.5
7
.5
7
.5
7
.5
7
.6
8
.6
8
.6
8
.6
9
.7
9
.7
9
.7
I0
1
2
X 2
3 4
I0
X 2
3 4
S M 221
X 2
3 4
9
X 2
3 4
S M 221
DI 8x DC24V
1
DI 8x DC24V
1
1
.0
2
.0
2
.0
2
.0
2
.1
3
.1
3
.1
3
.1
3
.2
4
.2
4
.2
4
.2
4
.3
5
.3
5
.3
5
.3
5
.4
6
.4
6
.4
6
.4
6
.5
7
.5
7
.5
7
.5
7
.6
8
.6
8
.6
8
.6
.7
9
.7
9
.7
9
.7
I0
X2
34
8
I0
SM 221
DI 8x DC24V
1
ON
I0
S M 221
DI 8x DC24V
C
O
M
1
M
O
U
S
E
D
C+
24 V
4
.3
.7
+
-
OFF
NE T
1
2
.1
PW
X2
34
DI 8x DC24V
1
.0
P C 288
K
B
D
SM 221
DI 8 x DC24V
1
RD
DC24V
D
V
M I
E
M
O
R
Y
SM 221
DI 8x DC24V
1
ER
ADR.
X5
67
SM 221
DI 8 xDC24V
PW
I0
X2
34
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
I0
X2
34
8
9
I0
X2
34
H eader module
lik e PC, CPU, buscoupler
Main module if this
is a double width
module or
peripheral module
P eripheral module
Guide rails
Chapter
13
Assembly
Please follow these rules during the assembly!
40 mm
60 mm
• Turn the power supply off before you insert or remove any modules!
• Make sure that a clearance of at least 60 mm exists above the bus rail
and 40 mm below the bus rail.
• Every row must be completed from left to right and it must start with a
header module (PC, CPU, and bus coupler).
1
2
3
[1]
[2]
4
[3]
[4]
Header module
lik e PC, CPU, bus
coupler
Header module
when this is a
double width or a
peripheral module
Per ipheral module
Guide rails
• Modules must be installed adjacent to each other. Gaps are not permitted between the modules since this would interrupt the back panel bus.
• A module is only installed properly and connected electrically when it
has clicked into place with an audible click.
• Plug-in locations after the last module can remain unoccupied.
Chapter 13 Assembly and installation guidelines
13-5
Assembly and installation guidelines
Assembly procedure
The following sequence represents the assembly procedure as viewed from
one side.
• Install the T-rail. Please ensure that you leave a module installation
clearance of at least 60 mm above the rail and at least 40 mm below the
rail.
• Install the T-rail. Please ensure that you leave a module installation
clearance of at least 60 mm above the rail and at least 40 mm below the
rail.
• Press the bus connector into the rail until it clips securely into place and
the bus-connectors protrude from the T-rail. This provides the basis for
the installation of your modules.
• Start at the outer left location with the installation of your header
module like CPU, PC or bus coupler and install the peripheral modules to
the right of this.
• Insert the module that you are installing into the T-rail at an angle of 45
degrees from the top and rotate the module into place until it clicks into
the T-rail with an audible click. The proper connection to the back panel
bus can only be guaranteed when the module has properly clicked into
place.
1
2
3
[1]
[2]
4
[3]
[4]
Header module
like PC, CPU, bus
coupler
Header module
when this is a
double width or a
peripheral module
Peripheral module
Guide rails
Attention!
Power must be turned off before modules are installed or removed!
13-6
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
13
Removal procedure
The following sequence shows the steps required for the removal of
modules in a side view.
• The enclosure of the module has a spring-loaded clip at the bottom by
which the module can be removed from the rail.
• Insert a screwdriver into the slot as shown
• The clip is unlocked by pressing the screwdriver in an upward direction.
• Withdraw the module with a slight rotation to the top.
Attention!
Power must be turned off before modules are installed or removed!
Please remember that the back panel bus is interrupted at the point where
the module was removed!
Chapter 13 Assembly and installation guidelines
13-7
Assembly and installation guidelines
Wiring
Most peripheral modules are equipped with a 10 pole or an 18-pole connector. This connector provides the electrical interface for the signaling and
supply lines of the modules.
The modules carry WAGO spring-clip connectors for the interconnections
and wiring.
The spring-clip connector technology simplifies the wiring requirements for
signaling and power cables.
In contrast to screw-terminal connections, spring-clip wiring is vibration
proof. The assignment of the terminals is contained in the description of the
respective modules.
You can connect conductors with a diameter from 0, 08 mm2 to 1,5 mm2 (up
to 1,5 mm2 for 18-pole connectors).
The following figure shows a module with a 10-pole connector.
Round aperture for wires
Rectangular opening for screwdriver
Note!
The spring-clip is destroyed if you should insert the screwdriver into the
opening for the hook-up wire!
Make sure that you only insert the screwdriver into the square hole of the
connector!
13-8
ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
13
Wiring procedure
• Install the connector on the module until it locks with an audible click.
For this purpose you must press the two clips together as shown. The
connector is now in a permanent position and can easily be wired.
The following section shows the wiring procedure from above.
• Insert a screwdriver at an angel into the square opening as shown
• You must press and hold the screwdriver in the opposite direction to
open the contact spring.
• Insert the stripped end of the hook-up wire into the round opening. You
can use wires with a diameter of 0, 08 mm2 to 2, 5 mm2 (1, 5 mm2 for 18
pole connectors).
• When you remove the screwdriver the wire is clipped securely.
Wire the power supply connections first
followed by the signal cables (inputs and outputs)
Chapter 13 Assembly and installation guidelines
13-9
Assembly and installation guidelines
Installation dimensions
Here follow all the important dimensions of the ADAM-8000.
Dimensions Basic enclosure
1-slot width (H x W x D) in mm: 76 x 25, 4 x 76
2-fach width (H x W x D) in mm: 76 x 50, 8 x 76
40 mm
60 mm
Installation dimensions
Installed and wired dimensions
35 mm
76 mm
6 mm
76 mm
90 mm
ca. 110 mm
13-10 ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
13
Installation guidelines
General
The installation guidelines contain information on the proper assembly of
ADAM-8000 systems. Here we describe possible paths in which interference like the electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) can enter controller and
how you must approach shielding and screening issues.
What is EMC?
The term electromagnetic compliance (EMC) refers to the ability of an
electrical device to operate properly in an electromagnetic environment
without interference from the environment or without the device causing
illegal interference to the environment.
All ADAM-8000 components were developed for applications in harsh
industrial environments and they comply with EMC requirements to a large
degree. In spite of this you should implement an EMCC strategy before
installing any components which should include any possible source of
interference.
Possible sources for disturbances
Electromagnetic interference can enter your system in many different ways:
• Fields
• I/O signal lines
• Bus systems
• Power supplies
• Protective conductors
Interference is coupled into your system in different ways, depending in the
propagation medium (via cabling or without cabling) and the distance to the
source of the interference.
We differentiate between:
• Galvanic coupling
• Capacitive coupling
• Inductive coupling
• Radiated power coupling
Chapter 13 Assembly and installation guidelines
13-11
Assembly and installation guidelines
The most important rules for ensuring EMC
In many cases, adherence to a set of very elementary rules is sufficient to
ensure EMC. For this reason we wish to advise you to heed the following
rules when you are installing these controllers.
• During the installation of your components you must ensure that any
inactive metal components are grounded via a proper large-surface
earth.
- Install a central connection between the chassis ground and the
earthing/protection system.
- Interconnect any inactive metal components via low-impedance
conductors with a large cross-sectional area.
- Avoid aluminum components. Aluminum oxidizes easily and is
therefore not suitable for grounding purposes.
• Ensure that wiring is routed properly during installation.
- Divide the cabling into different types of cable. (Heavy current, power
supply, signal- and data lines).
- Install heavy current lines and signal or data lines in separate channeling or cabling trusses.
- Install signaling and data lines as close as possible to any metallic
ground surfaces (e.g. frames, metal rails, sheet metal).
• Ensure that the screening of lines is grounded properly.
- Data lines must be screened.
- Analog lines must be screened. Where low-amplitude signals are
transferred it may be advisable to connect the screen on one side of
the cable only.
- Attach the screening of cables to the ground rail by means of large
surface connectors located as close as possible to the point of entry.
Clamp cables mechanically by means of cable clamps.
- Ensure that the ground rail has a low-impedance connection to the
cabinet/cubicle.
- Use only metallic or metalized covers for the plugs of screened data
lines.
• In critical cases you should implement special EMC measures.
- Connect snubber networks to all inductive loads that are not controlled by ADAM-8000 modules.
13-12 ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Chapter
13
- Use incandescent lamps for illumination purposes inside cabinets or
cubicles, do not use of fluorescent lamps.
• Create a single reference potential and ensure that all electrical equipment is grounded wherever possible.
- Ensure that earthing measures are implemented effectively. The
controllers are earthed to provide protection and for functional
reasons.
- Provide a star-shaped connection between the plant, cabinets/
cubicles of the ADAM-8000 and the earthing/ protection system. In
this way you can avoid ground loops.
- Where potential differences exist you must install sufficiently large
equipotential bonding conductors between the different parts of the
plant.
Screening of cables
The screening of cables reduces the influence of electrical, magnetic or
electromagnetic fields; we speak of attenuation.
The earthing rail that is connected conductively to the cabinet diverts
interfering currents from screen conductors to ground. It is essential that
the connection to the protective conductor is of low impedance as the
interfering currents could otherwise become a source of trouble in themselves.
The following must be noted when cables are screened:
• Use cables with braided screens wherever possible.
• The coverage of the screen should exceed 80%.
• Screens should always be grounded at both ends of cables. High
frequency interference can only be suppressed by grounding cables on
both ends.
Grounding at one end can become necessary under exceptional
circumstances. However, this only provides attenuation to low frequency
interference. One-sided earthing may be of advantage where:
- It is not possible to install equipotential bonding conductors
- Analogue signals (in the mV or µA range) are transferred
- Foil-type shields (static shields) are used.
Chapter 13 Assembly and installation guidelines
13-13
Assembly and installation guidelines
• Always use metallic or metallized covers for the plugs on data lines for
serial links. Connect the screen of the data line to the cover. Do not
connect the screen to PIN 1 of the plug!
• In a stationary environment it is recommended that the insulation is
stripped from the screened cable without breaking the cable to attach
the screen to the screening- or protective ground rail.
• Connect screening braids by means of metallic cable clamps. These
clamps must have a good electrical and large surface contact with the
screen.
• Attach the screen of a cable to the grounding rail directly where the
cable enters the cabinet/cubicle. Continue the screen right up to the
System 200 V module but do not connect the screen to ground at this
point!
Please heed the following when you assemble the system!
Where potential differences exist between earthing connections it is
possible that an equalising current could be established where the screen
of a cable is connected at both ends.
Remedy: install equipotential bonding conductors
13-14 ADAM 8000 Series User's Manual
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement